HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Series Service Manual. Www.s Manuals.com. Manual

User Manual: Multi-functional printer HP LaserJet M2727 MFP - Service manuals and Schematics, Disassembly / Assembly. Free.

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 370 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Series
Service Manual
HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Series
Service Manual
Copyright information
© 2007 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Part number CB532-90946
Edition 1, 11/2007
Safety information
WARNING!
Potential Shock Hazard
Always follow basic safety precautions when
using the product to reduce risk of injury from
fire or electric shock.
Read and understand all instructions in the
user guide.
Observe all warnings and instructions
marked on the product.
Use only a grounded electrical outlet when
connecting the product to a power source. If
you do not know whether the outlet is
grounded, check with a qualified electrician.
Do not touch the contacts on the end of any
of the sockets on the product. Replace
damaged cords immediately.
Unplug the product from wall outlets before
cleaning.
Do not install or use the product near water
or when you are wet.
Install the product securely on a stable
surface.
Install the product in a protected location
where no one can step on or trip over the
power cord and where the power cord will not
be damaged.
If the product does not operate normally, see
the online user guide.
Refer all servicing questions to qualified
personnel.
Information regarding FCC Class B, Parts 15
and 68 requirements can be found in the user
guide.
Trademark credits
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S.
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Windows Vista™ is either a registered
trademark or trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
PostScript® is a trademark of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Energy Star® and the Energy Star logo® are
U.S. registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Table of contents
1 Product information
Quick access to product information .................................................................................................... 2
Product comparison ............................................................................................................................. 3
Product features ................................................................................................................................... 4
Product walkaround .............................................................................................................................. 5
Front view ............................................................................................................................ 5
Back view ............................................................................................................................. 6
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................... 6
Control panel ....................................................................................................................... 7
Serial number and model number location ........................................................................................... 8
Software description ............................................................................................................................. 9
Supported operating systems .............................................................................................. 9
Supported printer drivers ..................................................................................................... 9
Software included with the product ...................................................................................... 9
Recommended installation for Windows ........................................................... 10
Express installation (USB or network) ............................................................... 10
Macintosh software ........................................................................................... 10
Software for Windows ........................................................................................................................ 12
HP ToolboxFX ................................................................................................................... 12
Embedded Web server (EWS) .......................................................................................... 12
Software for Macintosh ....................................................................................................................... 13
HP Director ........................................................................................................................ 13
Macintosh Configure Device (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later) ..................................... 13
PDEs (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later) ......................................................................... 14
Uninstall software ............................................................................................................................... 15
Windows ............................................................................................................................ 15
Macintosh .......................................................................................................................... 15
Media specifications ........................................................................................................................... 16
Supported paper and print media sizes ............................................................................. 16
Media to avoid ................................................................................................................... 17
Media that can damage the product .................................................................................. 17
2 Installation
Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 20
Minimum system requirements .......................................................................................... 21
Unpack the product ............................................................................................................................ 22
Install input devices ............................................................................................................................ 23
ADF input tray .................................................................................................................... 23
250-sheet input tray (tray 3) ............................................................................................... 24
ENWW iii
Install the control-panel faceplate ....................................................................................................... 25
Load paper and print media ............................................................................................................... 26
Load documents to fax, copy, or scan ............................................................................... 26
Tray 1 ................................................................................................................................. 27
Tray 2 or 3 ......................................................................................................................... 28
Configure trays .................................................................................................................. 29
Change tray selection ........................................................................................................ 29
Install memory DIMMs ........................................................................................................................ 30
Information ......................................................................................................................... 30
Install a memory DIMM ..................................................................................................... 30
3 Maintenance
Manage supplies ................................................................................................................................ 34
Life expectancies of supplies and the product ................................................................... 34
Order supplies ................................................................................................................... 34
Store print cartridges ......................................................................................................... 35
Replace and recycle supplies ............................................................................................ 35
Replace print cartridge ....................................................................................................... 37
Load staples ...................................................................................................................... 39
Replace the tray 2 pickup roller ......................................................................................... 40
Replace the tray 2 and optional tray 3 separation pad ...................................................... 45
HP policy on non-HP supplies ........................................................................................... 48
Reset the product for non-HP supplies ............................................................. 48
HP fraud hotline ................................................................................................................. 48
Clean the product ............................................................................................................................... 49
Clean the exterior .............................................................................................................. 49
Clean the flatbed scanner glass ........................................................................................ 49
Clean the scanner-cover backing ...................................................................................... 51
Clean the tray 2 pickup roller ............................................................................................ 52
Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly .............................................................................. 55
Clean the paper path ......................................................................................................... 56
Clean the paper path from HP ToolboxFX ........................................................ 57
Clean the paper path from the product control panel ........................................ 57
Manage the product ........................................................................................................................... 58
HP ToolboxFX ................................................................................................................... 58
View the HP ToolboxFX .................................................................................... 58
Status ................................................................................................................ 58
Event log ........................................................................................... 59
Alerts ................................................................................................................. 59
Set up status alerts ........................................................................... 59
Set up e-mail alerts ........................................................................... 59
Fax .................................................................................................................... 59
Fax tasks .......................................................................................... 60
Fax phone book ................................................................................ 60
Fax send log ..................................................................................... 62
Fax receive log ................................................................................. 62
Help (Documentation) ....................................................................................... 62
System settings ................................................................................................. 63
Device information ............................................................................ 63
Paper handling ................................................................................. 64
iv ENWW
Print quality ....................................................................................... 64
Paper types ...................................................................................... 64
System setup .................................................................................... 65
Service .............................................................................................. 65
Device Polling ................................................................................... 65
Print settings ..................................................................................................... 65
Printing ............................................................................................. 65
PCL 5e .............................................................................................. 66
PostScript ......................................................................................... 66
Network settings ................................................................................................ 66
Embedded Web server ...................................................................................................... 66
Features ............................................................................................................ 66
Secure the embedded Web server ................................................................... 67
Macintosh Configure Device (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later) ..................................... 67
4 Theory of operation
Basic operation ................................................................................................................................... 70
Sequence of operation for the base unit ............................................................................ 70
Scanner and ADF functions and operation ........................................................................................ 72
Scanner functions ............................................................................................................. 72
Scanner operation ............................................................................................................. 73
ADF operation .................................................................................................................... 73
ADF paper path and ADF sensors ..................................................................................... 74
ADF jam detection ............................................................................................................. 75
Internal components (base unit) ......................................................................................................... 76
Engine control system ........................................................................................................................ 78
Laser/scanner system ........................................................................................................................ 80
Pickup/feed/delivery system ............................................................................................................... 81
Image-formation system .................................................................................................................... 83
Fax functions and operation .............................................................................................................. 87
Computer and network security features ........................................................................... 87
PSTN operation ................................................................................................................. 87
Receive faxes when you hear fax tones ............................................................................ 87
Distinctive ring function ...................................................................................................... 88
Fax by using Voice over IP services .................................................................................. 88
The fax subsystem ............................................................................................................. 89
Fax card in the fax subsystem ........................................................................................... 89
Safety isolation .................................................................................................. 89
Safety-protection circuitry .................................................................................. 89
Data path ........................................................................................................... 90
Hook state ......................................................................................................... 90
Downstream device detection ........................................................................... 90
Hook switch control ........................................................................................... 90
Ring detect ........................................................................................................ 91
Line current control ........................................................................................... 91
Billing- (metering-) tone filters ........................................................................... 91
Fax page storage in flash memory .................................................................................... 91
Stored fax pages ............................................................................................... 91
Advantages of flash memory storage ............................................................... 91
ENWW v
5 Removal and replacement
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Removal and replacement strategy .................................................................................. 94
Electrostatic discharge ....................................................................................................... 94
User-replaceable parts ...................................................................................................... 94
Required tools ................................................................................................................... 95
Before performing service .................................................................................................. 95
After performing service ..................................................................................................... 96
Post-service tests .............................................................................................................. 96
Test 1 (print-quality test) ................................................................................... 96
Test 2 (copy-quality test) ................................................................................... 96
Test 3 (fax-quality test) ...................................................................................... 97
Parts removal order ........................................................................................................... 98
Remove the print cartridge ................................................................................................ 99
External panels, covers, and doors .................................................................................................. 100
Right cover ....................................................................................................................... 100
Left cover ......................................................................................................................... 102
Print-cartridge door .......................................................................................................... 104
Rear cover ....................................................................................................................... 106
Top cover ......................................................................................................................... 108
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly ......................................................................................... 110
ADF scanner glass ........................................................................................................................... 113
ADF assembly .................................................................................................................................. 115
Scanner/ADF assembly .................................................................................................................... 117
Bezel and control panel .................................................................................................................... 119
Internal assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 122
Convenience-stapler assembly (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ........................................ 122
Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) .................................. 124
Convenience-stapler AC inlet cable (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ................................. 126
Convenience-stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ..... 127
Speaker ........................................................................................................................... 128
Power-switch PCA ........................................................................................................... 130
Formatter ......................................................................................................................... 132
Duplex assembly ............................................................................................................. 135
Laser/scanner (print engine) ............................................................................................ 137
Memory-tag-reader assembly (E-label reader) ................................................................ 139
Fan ................................................................................................................................... 141
Duplex-drive gears ........................................................................................................... 143
Duplex solenoid ............................................................................................................... 145
Fuser ................................................................................................................................ 147
Interlock assembly ........................................................................................................... 152
Engine controller assembly (ECU) ................................................................................... 153
Main motor ....................................................................................................................... 158
Pickup-and-feed assemblies ............................................................................................ 160
Transfer roller .................................................................................................. 160
Registration-roller assembly ............................................................................................ 161
Main gear assembly and tray 2 pickup solenoid .............................................................. 162
6 Solve problems
Problem-solving checklist ................................................................................................................. 166
vi ENWW
Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................. 169
Alert and warning messages .......................................................................................... 169
Alert and warning message tables .................................................................. 169
Critical error messages .................................................................................................... 177
Critical error message-tables .......................................................................... 177
Clear jams ........................................................................................................................................ 179
Causes of jams ................................................................................................................ 179
Where to look for jams ..................................................................................................... 180
Clear jams from the ADF ................................................................................................. 180
Clear jams from the input-tray areas ............................................................................... 182
Clear jams from the duplexer ........................................................................................... 184
Clear jams from the output-bin areas .............................................................................. 186
Top (face-down) output bin ............................................................................. 186
Rear (face-up) output bin ................................................................................ 187
Clear jams from the print-cartridge area .......................................................................... 188
Clear jams from the convenience stapler (HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP only) ................ 189
Avoid repeated jams ....................................................................................................... 190
Control-panel menus ........................................................................................................................ 191
Use the control-panel main menus .................................................................................. 191
Control-panel main menus ............................................................................................... 191
Control-panel secondary menus ...................................................................................... 199
Use the control-panel secondary menus ......................................................... 199
Control-panel secondary menus ..................................................................... 199
Print problems .................................................................................................................................. 204
Print-quality problems ...................................................................................................... 204
Improve print quality ........................................................................................ 204
Print-quality settings ....................................................................... 204
Identify and correct print defects ..................................................................... 205
Print-quality checklist ...................................................................... 205
General print-quality issues ............................................................ 205
Scan problems ................................................................................................................................. 211
Solve scanned-image problems ...................................................................................... 211
Scan-quality problems ..................................................................................................... 213
Prevent problems ............................................................................................ 213
Solve scan-quality problems ........................................................................... 213
Copy problems ................................................................................................................................. 214
Prevent problems ............................................................................................................. 214
Image problems ............................................................................................................... 214
Media-handling problems ................................................................................................ 215
Performance problems .................................................................................................... 217
Fax problems .................................................................................................................................... 218
General fax problem-solve ............................................................................................... 218
Problems receiving faxes ................................................................................................. 219
Problems sending faxes .................................................................................................. 222
Voice-call problems ......................................................................................................... 224
Media-handling problems ................................................................................................ 225
Performance problems .................................................................................................... 226
Control-panel display problems ........................................................................................................ 227
Convenience-stapler problems (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ......................................................... 227
DSL problems ................................................................................................................................... 228
ENWW vii
PABX line problems ......................................................................................................... 228
ADF problems .................................................................................................................................. 229
Functional checks ............................................................................................................................. 230
Drum rotation test ............................................................................................................ 230
Engine test ....................................................................................................................... 231
Half self-test functional check .......................................................................................... 232
Perform a half self-test check .......................................................................................... 232
Perform other checks ....................................................................................................... 232
Heating element check .................................................................................................... 233
High-voltage contacts check ............................................................................................ 233
Check the print-cartridge contacts ................................................................ 233
Check the high-voltage connector assembly ................................................. 234
Service-mode functions .................................................................................................................... 235
NVRAM initialization ........................................................................................................ 235
Super NVRAM initialization .............................................................................................. 235
Service menu ................................................................................................................... 235
Problem-solve tools .......................................................................................................................... 237
Product information pages and reports ............................................................................ 237
Configuration page .......................................................................................... 237
Supplies Status page ...................................................................................... 237
PCL, PCL 6, or PS font list .............................................................................. 237
Demo page ...................................................................................................... 238
Usage page ..................................................................................................................... 238
Menu map ........................................................................................................................ 238
Network report ................................................................................................................. 238
Fax reports ....................................................................................................................... 239
Fax activity log ................................................................................................ 239
Fax call report ................................................................................................. 239
Phone book report ........................................................................................... 239
Billing-code report ........................................................................................... 240
HP ToolboxFX ................................................................................................................. 240
To view HP ToolboxFX ................................................................................... 240
Troubleshooting tab ........................................................................................ 240
Service menu .................................................................................................................. 241
Restore the factory-set defaults ...................................................................... 241
Clean the paper path ....................................................................................... 241
T.30 protocol trace .......................................................................................... 242
Archive print .................................................................................................... 242
Firmware updates ............................................................................................................................. 243
Firmware update by using a flash executable file ............................................................ 243
7 Parts
Accessories and ordering information .............................................................................................. 247
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................ 248
Memory ............................................................................................................................................ 248
Cable and interface accessories ...................................................................................................... 248
Paper-handling accessories ............................................................................................................ 249
Whole unit replacement .................................................................................................................... 250
Scanner/ADF replacement parts ...................................................................................................... 254
Control-panel bezels ........................................................................................................................ 255
viii ENWW
Supplementary documentation and support ..................................................................................... 257
Problem-solve diagrams ................................................................................................................... 259
Repetitive image defects ................................................................................................. 259
Interface connectors ....................................................................................................... 260
Formatter connectors ....................................................................................................... 260
Fax card ........................................................................................................................... 261
Solenoids ......................................................................................................................... 262
Switches and sensors ...................................................................................................... 263
Rollers and pads .............................................................................................................. 264
PCAs (base unit) .............................................................................................................. 265
Major components (base unit) ......................................................................................... 266
Scanner and ADF ............................................................................................................ 267
Circuit diagram (1 of 2) .................................................................................................... 268
Circuit diagram (2 of 2) .................................................................................................... 268
Parts lists and diagrams ................................................................................................................... 270
Types of screws ............................................................................................................... 271
Scanner and ADF assemblies .......................................................................................................... 272
Scanner components ....................................................................................................................... 274
ADF components .............................................................................................................................. 276
Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) .................................................... 278
Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate ................................................................................. 280
External covers and panels .............................................................................................................. 282
Cartridge door assembly .................................................................................................................. 284
Internal components (1 of 4) ............................................................................................................ 286
Internal components (2 of 4) ............................................................................................................ 288
Internal components (3 of 4) ............................................................................................................ 290
Internal components (4 of 4) ............................................................................................................ 292
Engine-controller assembly (ECU) ................................................................................................... 294
Main-drive assembly ........................................................................................................................ 296
Duplexing-drive assembly ................................................................................................................ 298
Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder ...................................................................................... 300
Duplexing assembly ......................................................................................................................... 302
Fuser assembly ................................................................................................................................ 304
Alphabetical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 306
Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................... 312
Appendix A Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 319
Print cartridge limited warranty statement ........................................................................................ 321
Appendix B Specifications
Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 324
Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 324
Power consumption .......................................................................................................................... 324
Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................ 325
Acoustic emissions ........................................................................................................................... 325
Appendix C Regulatory information
FCC compliance ............................................................................................................................... 328
ENWW ix
Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................... 329
Protecting the environment .............................................................................................. 329
Ozone production ............................................................................................................ 329
Power consumption ......................................................................................................... 329
Toner consumption .......................................................................................................... 329
Paper use ........................................................................................................................ 329
Plastics ............................................................................................................................ 329
HP LaserJet print supplies ............................................................................................... 329
Return and recycling instructions ..................................................................................... 330
United States and Puerto Rico ........................................................................ 330
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges) ........................................ 330
Single returns ................................................................................. 330
Shipping .......................................................................................... 330
Non-US returns ............................................................................................... 330
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 330
Material restrictions .......................................................................................................... 330
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union .... 331
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................ 331
For more information ....................................................................................................... 332
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (United States) ...................................................................... 333
IC CS-03 requirements ..................................................................................................................... 333
EU statement for telecom operation ................................................................................................. 334
New Zealand telecom statements .................................................................................................... 334
Declaration of conformity .................................................................................................................. 335
Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 336
Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 336
Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 336
EMI statement (Korea) ..................................................................................................... 336
Laser statement for Finland ............................................................................................. 337
Substances table (China) ................................................................................................ 338
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 339
xENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1 Product guides ................................................................................................................................... 2
Table 1-2 Supported printer drivers .................................................................................................................... 9
Table 1-3 Supported paper and print media sizes ........................................................................................... 16
Table 1-4 Supported envelopes and postcards ............................................................................................... 17
Table 1-5 ADF .................................................................................................................................................. 17
Table 4-1 Sequence of operation ..................................................................................................................... 70
Table 4-2 Power-on sequence ......................................................................................................................... 71
Table 6-1 Alert and warning messages ......................................................................................................... 169
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages ......................................................................................................... 172
Table 6-3 Critical error messages .................................................................................................................. 177
Table 6-4 Fax Job status menu ...................................................................................................................... 191
Table 6-5 Fax functions menu ........................................................................................................................ 191
Table 6-6 Copy setup menu ........................................................................................................................... 192
Table 6-7 Reports menu ................................................................................................................................. 193
Table 6-8 Fax setup menu ............................................................................................................................. 194
Table 6-9 System setup menu ....................................................................................................................... 197
Table 6-10 Service menu ............................................................................................................................... 199
Table 6-11 Secondary service menu .............................................................................................................. 200
Table 6-12 Developer's menu ........................................................................................................................ 201
Table 7-1 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB532A ......................................................................... 250
Table 7-2 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB533A ......................................................................... 252
Table 7-3 Control-panel bezels ...................................................................................................................... 255
Table 7-4 Service and training support .......................................................................................................... 257
Table 7-5 User guides .................................................................................................................................... 257
Table 7-6 Getting started guide ...................................................................................................................... 258
Table 7-7 Technical support Web sites .......................................................................................................... 258
Table 7-8 Repetitive image defects ................................................................................................................ 259
Table 7-9 Interface connectors ....................................................................................................................... 260
Table 7-10 Formatter connectors ................................................................................................................... 260
Table 7-11 Fax card ....................................................................................................................................... 261
Table 7-12 Solenoids ..................................................................................................................................... 262
Table 7-13 Switches and sensors .................................................................................................................. 263
Table 7-14 Rollers and pads .......................................................................................................................... 264
Table 7-15 PCAs (base unit) .......................................................................................................................... 265
Table 7-16 Major components (base unit) ..................................................................................................... 266
Table 7-17 Scanner and ADF ......................................................................................................................... 267
Table 7-18 Scanner and ADF assemblies ..................................................................................................... 273
Table 7-19 Scanner components ................................................................................................................... 275
Table 7-20 ADF components ......................................................................................................................... 277
ENWW xi
Table 7-21 Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ................................................ 279
Table 7-22 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate ........................................................................... 281
Table 7-23 External covers and panels .......................................................................................................... 283
Table 7-24 Cartridge door assembly .............................................................................................................. 285
Table 7-25 Internal components (1 of 4) ........................................................................................................ 287
Table 7-26 Internal components (2 of 4) ........................................................................................................ 289
Table 7-27 Internal components (3 of 4) ........................................................................................................ 291
Table 7-28 Internal components (4 of 4) ........................................................................................................ 293
Table 7-29 Engine-controller assembly .......................................................................................................... 295
Table 7-30 Main-drive assembly .................................................................................................................... 297
Table 7-31 Duplexing-drive assembly ............................................................................................................ 299
Table 7-32 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder .................................................................................. 301
Table 7-33 Duplexing assembly ..................................................................................................................... 303
Table 7-34 Fuser assembly ............................................................................................................................ 305
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................... 306
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 312
Table B-1 Physical specifications ................................................................................................................... 324
Table B-2 Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................. 324
Table B-3 Power consumption (average, in watts), ...................................................................................... 324
Table B-4 Environmental specifications ........................................................................................................ 325
Table B-5 Acoustic emissions ....................................................................................................................... 325
xii ENWW
List of figures
Figure 2-1 Operating environment ................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 2-2 HP LaserJet M2727 MFP package contents .................................................................................. 22
Figure 2-3 Install the ADF input tray ................................................................................................................. 23
Figure 2-4 Install the 250-sheet input tray ........................................................................................................ 24
Figure 2-5 Install the control-panel faceplate ................................................................................................... 25
Figure 2-6 Load a document onto the flatbed scanner .................................................................................... 26
Figure 2-7 Load documents into the ADF (1 of 2) ............................................................................................ 27
Figure 2-8 Load documents into the ADF (2 of 2) ............................................................................................ 27
Figure 3-1 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 7) .......................................................................................... 40
Figure 3-2 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 7) .......................................................................................... 41
Figure 3-3 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 7) .......................................................................................... 41
Figure 3-4 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (4 of 7) .......................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-5 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (5 of 7) .......................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-6 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (6 of 7) .......................................................................................... 43
Figure 3-7 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (7 of 7) .......................................................................................... 43
Figure 3-8 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (1 of 6) ....................................................................... 45
Figure 3-9 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (2 of 6) ....................................................................... 45
Figure 3-10 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (3 of 6) ..................................................................... 46
Figure 3-11 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (4 of 6) ..................................................................... 46
Figure 3-12 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (5 of 6) ..................................................................... 47
Figure 3-13 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (6 of 6) ..................................................................... 47
Figure 3-14 Clean the scanner glass (1 of 2) ................................................................................................... 49
Figure 3-15 Clean the scanner glass (2 of 2) ................................................................................................... 50
Figure 3-16 Clean the scanner-cover backing ................................................................................................. 51
Figure 3-17 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 6) ............................................................................................ 52
Figure 3-18 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 6) ............................................................................................ 52
Figure 3-19 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 6) ............................................................................................ 52
Figure 3-20 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (4 of 6) ............................................................................................ 53
Figure 3-21 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (5 of 6) ............................................................................................ 53
Figure 3-22 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (6 of 6) ............................................................................................ 54
Figure 3-23 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (1 of 5) ............................................................................. 55
Figure 3-24 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (2 of 5) ............................................................................. 55
Figure 3-25 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (3 of 5) ............................................................................. 55
Figure 3-26 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (4 of 5) ............................................................................. 56
Figure 3-27 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (5 of 5) ............................................................................. 56
Figure 4-1 HP LaserJet M2727 MFP system block diagram ............................................................................ 70
Figure 4-2 Optical system ................................................................................................................................ 72
Figure 4-3 ADF paper path ............................................................................................................................... 74
Figure 4-4 Cross-section of printer ................................................................................................................... 76
ENWW xiii
Figure 4-5 Engine control system ..................................................................................................................... 78
Figure 4-6 Engine-control-system circuit diagram ............................................................................................ 79
Figure 4-7 Laser/scanner system ..................................................................................................................... 80
Figure 4-8 Pickup/feed/delivery system ........................................................................................................... 82
Figure 4-9 Image-formation system ................................................................................................................. 83
Figure 4-10 Primary charging ........................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 4-11 Developing .................................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 4-12 Transfer ......................................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 4-13 Separation ..................................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 4-14 Fusing ........................................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 4-15 Drum cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 5-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison ............................................................................... 95
Figure 5-2 Parts-removal tree .......................................................................................................................... 98
Figure 5-3 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2) ................................................................................................. 99
Figure 5-4 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2) ................................................................................................. 99
Figure 5-5 Remove the right cover (1 of 4) .................................................................................................... 100
Figure 5-6 Remove the right cover (2 of 4) .................................................................................................... 100
Figure 5-7 Remove the right cover (3 of 4) .................................................................................................... 101
Figure 5-8 Remove the right cover (4 of 4) .................................................................................................... 101
Figure 5-9 Remove the left cover (1 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 102
Figure 5-10 Remove the left cover (2 of 3) ..................................................................................................... 102
Figure 5-11 Remove the left cover (3 of 3) ..................................................................................................... 103
Figure 5-12 Remove the print-cartridge door (1 of 3) ..................................................................................... 104
Figure 5-13 Remove the print-cartridge door (2 of 3) ..................................................................................... 104
Figure 5-14 Remove the print-cartridge door (3 of 3) ..................................................................................... 105
Figure 5-15 Remove the rear cover (1 of 3) ................................................................................................... 106
Figure 5-16 Remove the rear cover (2 of 3) ................................................................................................... 106
Figure 5-17 Remove the rear cover (3 of 3) ................................................................................................... 107
Figure 5-18 Remove the top cover (1 of 4) .................................................................................................... 108
Figure 5-19 Remove the top cover (2 of 4) .................................................................................................... 108
Figure 5-20 Remove the top cover (3 of 4) .................................................................................................... 109
Figure 5-21 Remove the top cover (4 of 4) .................................................................................................... 109
Figure 5-22 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (1 of 6) ....................................................................... 110
Figure 5-23 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (2 of 6) ....................................................................... 110
Figure 5-24 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (3 of 6) ....................................................................... 111
Figure 5-25 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (4 of 6) ....................................................................... 111
Figure 5-26 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (5 of 6) ....................................................................... 112
Figure 5-27 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (6 of 6) ....................................................................... 112
Figure 5-28 Removing the ADF scanner glass (1 of 3) .................................................................................. 113
Figure 5-29 Removing the ADF scanner glass (2 of 3) .................................................................................. 113
Figure 5-30 Removing the ADF scanner glass (3 of 3) .................................................................................. 114
Figure 5-31 Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 3) ............................................................................................ 115
Figure 5-32 Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 3) ............................................................................................ 115
Figure 5-33 Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 3) ............................................................................................ 116
Figure 5-34 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (1 of 4) .............................................................................. 117
Figure 5-35 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (2 of 4) .............................................................................. 117
Figure 5-36 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (3 of 4) .............................................................................. 118
Figure 5-37 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (4 of 4) .............................................................................. 118
Figure 5-38 Remove the bezel and control panel (1 of 4) .............................................................................. 119
Figure 5-39 Remove the bezel and control panel (2 of 4) .............................................................................. 119
xiv ENWW
Figure 5-40 Remove the bezel and control panel (3 of 4) .............................................................................. 120
Figure 5-41 Remove the bezel and control panel (4 of 4) .............................................................................. 121
Figure 5-42 Remove the convenience-stapler assembly (1 of 2) ................................................................... 122
Figure 5-43 Remove the convenience-stapler assembly (2 of 2) ................................................................... 123
Figure 5-44 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (1 of 3) ........................................................ 124
Figure 5-45 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (2 of 3) ........................................................ 124
Figure 5-46 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (3 of 3) ........................................................ 125
Figure 5-47 Remove the convenience-stapler AC inlet cable ........................................................................ 126
Figure 5-48 Remove the convenience-stapler bracket and strap .................................................................. 127
Figure 5-49 Remove the speaker (1 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 128
Figure 5-50 Remove the speaker (2 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 129
Figure 5-51 Remove the power-switch PCA (HP LaserJet M2727nfs shown) ............................................... 130
Figure 5-52 Remove the power-switch PCA mounting bracket ..................................................................... 131
Figure 5-53 Remove the formatter (1 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 132
Figure 5-54 Remove the formatter (2 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 133
Figure 5-55 Install formatter protective sheet ................................................................................................. 133
Figure 5-56 Remove the formatter (3 of 4) ..................................................................................................... 134
Figure 5-57 Remove the formatter (4 of 4) ..................................................................................................... 134
Figure 5-58 Remove the duplex assembly (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 135
Figure 5-59 Remove the duplex assembly (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 136
Figure 5-60 Remove the laser/scanner assembly .......................................................................................... 138
Figure 5-61 Remove the memory-tag-reader assembly (1 of 2) .................................................................... 139
Figure 5-62 Remove the memory-tag-reader assembly (2 of 2) .................................................................... 140
Figure 5-63 Memory-tag-reader assembly spring .......................................................................................... 140
Figure 5-64 Remove the fan (1 of 2) .............................................................................................................. 141
Figure 5-65 Remove the fan (2 of 2) .............................................................................................................. 142
Figure 5-66 Remove the duplex-drive gears .................................................................................................. 144
Figure 5-67 Replace the duplex-drive gears .................................................................................................. 144
Figure 5-68 Remove the duplex solenoid (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 145
Figure 5-69 Remove the duplex solenoid (2 of 2) .......................................................................................... 146
Figure 5-70 Remove the fuser (1 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 147
Figure 5-71 Remove the fuser (2 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 148
Figure 5-72 Remove the fuser (3 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 148
Figure 5-73 Remove the fuser (4 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 149
Figure 5-74 Remove the fuser (5 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 149
Figure 5-75 Remove the fuser (6 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 150
Figure 5-76 Remove the fuser (7 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 150
Figure 5-77 Remove the fuser (8 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 151
Figure 5-78 Remove the fuser (9 of 9) ........................................................................................................... 151
Figure 5-79 Remove the interlock assembly .................................................................................................. 152
Figure 5-80 Remove the ECU (1 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 154
Figure 5-81 Remove the ECU (2 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 154
Figure 5-82 Remove the ECU (3 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 155
Figure 5-83 Remove the ECU (4 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 155
Figure 5-84 Remove the ECU (5 of 8) ............................................................................................................ 156
Figure 5-85 Remove the ECU (6 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 156
Figure 5-86 Remove the ECU (7 of 7) ............................................................................................................ 157
Figure 5-87 Remove the main motor (1 of 2) ................................................................................................. 158
Figure 5-88 Remove the main motor (2 of 2) ................................................................................................. 159
Figure 5-89 Remove the transfer roller .......................................................................................................... 160
ENWW xv
Figure 5-90 Remove the registration-roller assembly .................................................................................... 161
Figure 5-91 Remove the main gear assembly (1 of 5) ................................................................................... 162
Figure 5-92 Remove the main gear assembly (2 of 5) ................................................................................... 163
Figure 5-93 Remove the main gear assembly (3 of 5) ................................................................................... 163
Figure 5-94 Remove the main gear assembly (4 of 5) ................................................................................... 164
Figure 5-95 Remove the tray 2 pickup solenoid (5 of 5) ................................................................................ 164
Figure 6-1 Engine test switch ......................................................................................................................... 231
Figure 6-2 Print-cartridge high-voltage connection points (right side) ............................................................ 233
Figure 6-3 Print-cartridge high-voltage connection points (left side) .............................................................. 234
Figure 7-1 Interface connectors ..................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 7-2 Formatter connectors .................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 7-3 Fax card connectors ..................................................................................................................... 261
Figure 7-4 Solenoids ...................................................................................................................................... 262
Figure 7-5 Switches and sensors ................................................................................................................... 263
Figure 7-6 Rollers and pads ........................................................................................................................... 264
Figure 7-7 PCAs (base unit) ........................................................................................................................... 265
Figure 7-8 Major components (base unit) ...................................................................................................... 266
Figure 7-9 Scanner and ADF ......................................................................................................................... 267
Figure 7-10 Circuit diagram (1 of 2) ............................................................................................................... 268
Figure 7-11 Circuit diagram (2 of 2) ............................................................................................................... 269
Figure 7-12 Scanner and ADF assemblies .................................................................................................... 272
Figure 7-13 Scanner assemblies .................................................................................................................... 274
Figure 7-14 ADF components ........................................................................................................................ 276
Figure 7-15 Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) ............................................... 278
Figure 7-16 Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate ........................................................................... 280
Figure 7-17 External covers and panels ........................................................................................................ 282
Figure 7-18 Cartridge door assembly ............................................................................................................. 284
Figure 7-19 Internal components (1 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 286
Figure 7-20 Internal components (2 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 288
Figure 7-21 Internal components (3 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 290
Figure 7-22 Internal components (4 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 292
Figure 7-23 Engine-controller assembly ......................................................................................................... 294
Figure 7-24 Main-drive assembly ................................................................................................................... 296
Figure 7-25 Duplexing-drive assembly ........................................................................................................... 298
Figure 7-26 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder ................................................................................. 300
Figure 7-27 Duplexing assembly .................................................................................................................... 302
Figure 7-28 Fuser assembly ........................................................................................................................... 304
xvi ENWW
1 Product information
●Quick access to product information
●Product comparison
●Product features
●Product walkaround
●Serial number and model number location
●Software description
●Software for Windows
●Software for Macintosh
●Uninstall software
●Media specifications
ENWW 1
Quick access to product information
Use the following Web site to find information about the product.
●www.hp.com/support/LJM2727
Table 1-1 Product guides
Guide Description
HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Getting
Started Guide
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and setting up the product.
HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Series
User Guide
Provides detailed information for using the product and problem-solving. Available on the
product CD or in the Windows Program Group if the software is installed on a computer.
HP ToolboxFX To check the product status and settings, and to view problem-solving information and online
documentation, use the HP ToolboxFX. You must have performed a complete software
installation in order to use the HP ToolboxFX. See the user guide for more information about
software installation.
Online Help Provides information about options that are available in the printer drivers. To view a Help
file, open the online Help through the printer driver.
2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Product comparison
The product is available in the following configurations.
HP LaserJet M2727nf MFP HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP
●Prints letter-size pages at speeds up to 27 pages per
minute (ppm) and A4-size pages at speeds up to 26 ppm.
●PCL 5 and PCL 6 printer drivers and HP postscript level
3 emulation.
●Tray 1 holds up to 50 sheets of print media or up to 5
envelopes.
●Tray 2 holds up to 250 sheets of print media.
●Optional 250-sheet input tray (tray 3) available.
●Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing, fax receiving, and
copying.
●Average yield for the standard black print cartridge is
3,500 pages, in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual
yield depends on specific use.
●Average yield for the high-capacity print cartridge is 7,000
pages, in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual yield
depends on specific use.
●Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port and 10/100 Base-T network port.
●V.34 fax modem and 8-megabyte (MB) flash fax-storage
memory.
●Two RJ-11 fax phone line ports.
●64-MB random-access memory (RAM).
●Flatbed scanner and 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF).
●One available DIMM slot for memory expansion (up to
320 MB).
HP LaserJet M2727nf MFP, plus:
●Additional 250-sheet input tray (tray 3) included.
●Convenience stapler.
ENWW Product comparison 3
Product features
Performance ●Prints up to 27 ppm (letter) or 26 ppm (A4).
Print quality ●1,200 dots per inch (dpi) with Image REt 2400 text and graphics.
●Adjustable settings to optimize print quality.
●The HP UltraPrecise print cartridge has a finer toner formulation that provides sharper text
and graphics.
Fax ●Full-functionality fax capabilities with a V.34 fax; includes a phone book, fax/tel, and
delayed-fax features.
Copy ●Includes ADF that allows faster, more efficient copy jobs with multiple-page documents.
Scan ●The product provides 1,200 pixels per inch (ppi), 24-bit full-color scanning from letter/A4-
size scanner glass.
●The product provides 300 ppi, 24-bit full-color scanning from the automatic document
feeder (ADF).
●Includes an ADF that allows faster, more efficient scan jobs with multiple-page documents.
Staple ●The HP LaserJet M2727nfs includes a convenience stapler for fast and convenient
stapling of up to 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb media at the product.
●Large-capacity replaceable staple cassette holds 1,500 staples.
Networking ●TCP/IP
◦IPv4
◦IPv6
Printer driver features ●Fast printing performance, built-in Intellifont and TrueType scaling technologies, and
advanced imaging capabilities are benefits of the PCL 6 printer language.
Interface connections ●Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port.
●10/100 Base-T ethernet network port (RJ-45).
●RJ-11 fax/phone cable ports.
Economical printing ●N-up printing (printing more than one page on a sheet).
●Two-sided printing using the automatic duplexer.
●EconoMode setting.
Supplies ●A supplies status page that displays the amount of life remaining in the print cartridge.
●No-shake cartridge design.
●Authentication for HP print cartridges.
●Enabled supplies-ordering capability.
Accessibility ●Online user guide that is compatible with text screen-readers.
●Print cartridges can be installed and removed using one hand.
●All doors and covers can be opened using one hand.
4 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Product walkaround
Front view
1Tray 2
2Tray 1
3Print-cartridge door latch
4Top (face-down) output bin
5Control panel
6Automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray
7Automatic document feeder (ADF) output bin
8Convenience stapler (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
9Power switch
10 Optional tray 3 (standard on the HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP)
ENWW Product walkaround 5
Back view
14
13
12
11
11 Power connector
12 Rear output door (face-up output bin for the straight-through output path)
13 DIMM door
14 Interface ports
Interface ports
The product has a 10/100 Base-T (RJ-45) network port, a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port, and fax ports.
23
1
1Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port
2Network port
3Fax ports
6 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Control panel
5
13
2 4
05
06
07
08
Shift
1Fax controls. Use the fax controls to change commonly used fax settings.
2Alphanumeric buttons. Use the alphanumeric buttons to type data into the product control-panel display and dial
telephone numbers for faxing.
3Setup and cancel controls. Use these controls to select menu options, determine the product status, and cancel the
current job.
4Copy controls. Use these controls to change commonly used default settings and to start copying.
5Scan controls. Use these controls to scan to e-mail or to a folder.
ENWW Product walkaround 7
Serial number and model number location
The serial number and product model number label is on the rear output bin door at the back of the
product.
8 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Software description
Supported operating systems
The product supports the following operating systems:
Full software installation
●Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
●Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later
Print and scan driver
●Windows 98
●Windows 2000
●Windows 2003 Server (32-bit and
64-bit)
Printer driver only
●Linux (Web only)
●UNIX model scripts (Web only)
NOTE: For Mac OS X v10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.
Supported printer drivers
The following printer drivers are provided. If the printer driver you want is not on the product CD or is
not available on www.hp.com, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that you are using,
and request a driver for the product.
NOTE: The most recent drivers are available at www.hp.com. Depending on the configuration of
Windows-based computers, the installation program for the product software automatically checks the
computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.
Table 1-2 Supported printer drivers
Operating system
1
Fax driver PCL 6 printer
driver
PCL 5 printer
driver
PS printer driver PPD
2
printer
driver
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Millennium
Edition (Me)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac OS X v10.3,
v10.4, and later
XXX
1Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the context-sensitive help in the printer driver
for available features.
2A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PostScript (PS) Printer Description Files (PPDs) are included with the product.
Software included with the product
There are several options for completing a recommended installation. Easy Install will complete the
installation with default settings. Advanced Install allows you to select custom settings and choose the
components that are installed.
ENWW Software description 9
Recommended installation for Windows
●HP drivers
◦PCL 6 printer driver
◦Scan driver
●HP MFP software
◦HP ToolboxFX
◦HP LaserJet Scan program
◦HP Send Fax program and driver
◦HP Fax Setup Wizard
◦Uninstall program
●HP Update program
●HP Customer Participation Program
●Shop for HP Supplies program
●Other programs
◦Readiris OCR (not installed with other software; separate installation is required)
Express installation (USB or network)
The following software is included with an Express installation:
●PCL 6 printer driver
●HP LaserJet Scan program and driver
NOTE: Express installation supports faxing by using the control panel.
NOTE: PCL 5 and HP postscript level 3 emulation drivers can be installed using the Microsoft Add
Printer wizard.
Macintosh software
●HP Product Setup Assistant
●HP Device Configuration
●HP Uninstaller
●HP LaserJet software
◦HP Scan
◦HP Director
◦Fax program
10 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
◦Scan to e-mail program
◦HP Photosmart
ENWW Software description 11
Software for Windows
When you install the software for Windows, you can directly connect the product to a computer by using
a USB cable, or you can connect the product to a network by using the internal print server. See the
getting started guide for installation instructions, and see the Readme file for the latest software
information.
HP ToolboxFX
Perform a typical installation in order to use HP ToolboxFX.
HP ToolboxFX provides links to product status information and Help information, such as the user guide,
and tools for product problem-solving. See HP ToolboxFX on page 58.
Embedded Web server (EWS)
The EWS is a Web-based interface that provides simple access to product status and configurations,
including network configurations and Smart Printing Supplies (SPS) functionality.
You can gain access to the EWS through the network connection to the product. Type the product IP
address in a Web browser to open the product EWS home page in the browser. From the home page,
you can use the tabs and left navigation menu to check the status of the product, configure the product,
or check the status of the supplies.
The following are supported browsers:
●Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
●Netscape Navigator 4.75 or later
●Opera 6.05 or later
●Safari 1.2 or later
12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Software for Macintosh
For Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later, use Print Center to print.
NOTE: For Macintosh computers, HP ToolboxFX is not supported.
HP Director
HP Director is a software program for working with documents. When the document is loaded into the
ADF and the computer is connected directly to the product, HP Director appears on the computer screen
to initiate faxing, scanning, or changing settings on the product through Macintosh Configure Device.
Also included is the HP product Setup Assistant, which sets up the fax and print queues.
Macintosh Configure Device (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later)
Macintosh Configure Device is a Web-based program that provides access to information about the
product (or example, information about supplies status and product settings). Use Macintosh Configure
Device to monitor and manage the product from the computer.
NOTE: You must perform a complete software installation to use Macintosh Configure Device.
●Check the product status and print information pages.
●Check and change product settings.
●Check default print settings.
●Check and change fax settings, including IP configuration, Advanced, mDNS, SNMP, network
configuration, and fax reports.
You can view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is directly connected to a computer or when
it is connected to the network.
NOTE: You do not have to have Internet access to open and use Macintosh Configure Device.
To view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is connected to the computer
1. Open HP Director by clicking the HP Director icon in the dock.
2. In HP Director, click Settings.
3. Select Configure Device to open the Macintosh Configure Device home page in a browser.
To view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is connected to the network
1. Open one of the following browsers:
●Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
●Netscape Navigator 4.75 or later
●Opera 6.05 or later
●Safari 1.2 or later
2. Type the IP address of the product into the Web browser to open the Macintosh Configure Device
home page.
ENWW Software for Macintosh 13
PDEs (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later)
PDEs are code plug-ins that provide access to product features, such as information about the number
of copies, two-sided printing, and quality settings. An installation program for the PDEs and other
software is provided on the product CD for Macintosh.
14 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Uninstall software
Windows
Use the Add or Remove Programs method in Windows to remove the product software. This method
does not require you to have the software CD.
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
NOTE: In Windows XP, click Start, and then click Control panel.
2. Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3. Scroll through the list of software programs and click HP LaserJet M2727.
4. Click Remove.
Macintosh
To remove the software, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
ENWW Uninstall software 15
Media specifications
Supported paper and print media sizes
NOTE: See the user guide for information about using media correctly.
This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media.
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in the print driver before
printing. Use conventional 75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to 24 lb) photocopy paper. Verify that the paper is of good
quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, and bent edges.
Table 1-3 Supported paper and print media sizes
Size Dimensions Tray 1 Trays 2 and 3
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 inches)
A3 297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
16k 197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
16k 195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 inches)
16k 184 x 260 mm (7.25 x 10.25 inches)
8.5 x 13 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
4 x 6
1
107 x 152 mm (4 x 6 inches)
5 x 8
1
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 inches)
10 x 15 cm
1
100 x 150 mm (3.9 x 5.9 inches)
Custom Tray 1: Minimum—76 x127 mm (3 x 5 inches);
Maximum—216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Trays 2 and 3: Minimum—148 x 210 mm (5.8 x
8.3 inches); Maximum—216 x 356 mm (8.5 x
14 inches)
1These sizes are supported as custom sizes.
16 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Table 1-4 Supported envelopes and postcards
Size Dimensions Tray 1 Trays 2 and 3
Envelope #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 inches) Not supported.
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Not supported.
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Not supported.
Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches) Not supported.
Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches) Not supported.
Postcard 100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 inches) Not supported.
Double postcard 148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 inches) Not supported.
Table 1-5 ADF
Media Dimensions Weight Capacity
Minimum-size 127 x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches) 60 to 90 gm2 (16 to 24 lb) 50 sheets
Maximum-size 216 x 381 mm (8.5 x
15 inches)
NOTE: When faxing, copying, or scanning using the product, use the flatbed scanner if the original is
fragile, thin, thick, too small for the ADF, or a photograph. Also use the flatbed scanner for the fit-to-
page copying feature. The flatbed scanner provides the best fax, copy, and scan resolution.
Media to avoid
The product can handle many types of media. Using media that is outside the specifications degrades
print quality and increases the chance of jams occurring.
●Do not use media that is too rough.
●Do not use media that contains cutouts or perforations other than standard 3-hole punched paper.
●Do not use multipart forms.
●Do not use paper that contains a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
Media that can damage the product
In rare circumstances, media can damage the product. Avoid the following types of media to prevent
possible damage:
●Do not use media with staples attached.
●Do not use transparencies designed for inkjet printers or other low-temperature printers. Use only
transparencies that are specified for use with HP LaserJet printers.
●Do not use photo paper intended for inkjet printers.
ENWW Media specifications 17
●Do not use paper that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperature of the image-
fuser. Select media that can tolerate temperatures of 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second.
HP manufactures a media that is designed for the product.
●Do not use letterhead paper that was produced with low-temperature dyes or thermography.
Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 200°C (392°F) for
0.1 second.
●Do not use any media that produces emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when exposed
to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second.
To order HP LaserJet printing supplies, go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies in the U.S., or go to
www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies worldwide.
18 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
2 Installation
●Operating environment
●Unpack the product
●Install input devices
●Install the control-panel faceplate
●Load paper and print media
●Install memory DIMMs
ENWW 19
Operating environment
Place the product on a sturdy, level surface in a well-ventilated area. Make sure that the air vents are
not blocked and that the product is installed away from direct sunlight, open flames, and ammonia fumes.
Store or install the product in an area that meets the following requirements:
●Temperature (printer; operating) 15
o
to 32.5
o
C (59
o
to 90.5
o
F)
●Temperature (printer; storage) -20
o
to 60
o
C (-4
o
to 140
o
F)
●Humidity (printer; operating) 10% to 80% relative humidity (no condensation)
●Humidity (printer; storage) 10% to 90% relative humidity (no condensation)
●Temperature (toner cartridge; storage) -20
o
to 40
o
C (-4 to 104
o
F)
●Humidity (toner cartridge; storage) 10% to 90% relative humidity (no condensation)
Figure 2-1 Operating environment
700 mm (27.5 inches)
595 mm (23.5 inches)
790 mm (31.0 inches)
20 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Minimum system requirements
●Windows OS (Win 98, Win 2000, 2003 Server, Millennium Edition (Me), XP, or Vista)
or
Mac OS X v10.3 and later
●128 MB RAM for Windows operating systems
●32 MB RAM for Macintosh operating systems
●250 MB hard-disk space (full installation)
●CD-ROM drive
●USB port
ENWW Operating environment 21
Unpack the product
The following components are included in the box.
NOTE: The USB and network cables are not included.
Figure 2-2 HP LaserJet M2727 MFP package contents
2
3
5
4
16
7
8
9
Item Description
1Automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray
2HP LaserJet M2727 MFP
3Power cord
4Fax cord
5Print cartridge
6Start guide and support flyer
7CD-ROMs (software and online user guide)
8250-sheet media input tray (optional tray 3, standard on the HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
9Control-panel faceplate (if not already installed)
Installing the supplies (for example, the print cartridge) is similar to replacing them. See Manage supplies
on page 34 for more information about installing supplies.
22 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Install input devices
ADF input tray
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Align the two tabs on the input tray with the grooves in the ADF.
3. Slide the tray into the grooves until the tray snaps into place.
4. Close the ADF cover.
Figure 2-3 Install the ADF input tray
ENWW Install input devices 23
250-sheet input tray (tray 3)
CAUTION: Always install the 250-sheet tray (tray 3) in the location where the product will remain. The
assembled combination is heavy, and cannot be easily moved.
1. Place the 250-sheet feeder (tray 3) on a sturdy, level surface.
2. Using the alignment pins at the corners of the tray as a guide place the product on top of the tray.
3. Make sure that the right-rear connector (callout 1) connects with the product.
Figure 2-4 Install the 250-sheet input tray
1
24 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Install the control-panel faceplate
NOTE: The control-panel faceplate might already be installed.
1. Lift the scanner cover.
2. Align the control-panel faceplate with the product.
3. Beginning in the center of the faceplate and working outward, press the faceplate until it snaps into
place.
Figure 2-5 Install the control-panel faceplate
1
2
3
23
ENWW Install the control-panel faceplate 25
Load paper and print media
Load documents to fax, copy, or scan
NOTE: For the best-quality scans, use the flatbed scanner.
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner
1. Make sure that the automatic document feeder (ADF) contains no media.
2. Lift the scanner cover.
3. Place the original document face-down on the flatbed scanner glass with the upper-left corner of
the document at the lower-right corner of the glass.
Figure 2-6 Load a document onto the flatbed scanner
4. Gently close the scanner cover.
The document is ready to be faxed/copied/scanned.
26 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
To load originals into the ADF
NOTE: The ADF capacity for the product is up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) media.
1. Insert the stack of originals into the ADF input tray top-edge-first, with the media stack face-up and
the first page to be copied on the top of the stack. Slide the stack into the ADF until it does not
move any farther.
Figure 2-7 Load documents into the ADF (1 of 2)
2. Adjust the media guides until they are snug against the stack.
Figure 2-8 Load documents into the ADF (2 of 2)
3. The document is ready to be faxed, copied, or scanned.
Tray 1
Tray 1 is accessed from the front of the product. The product prints from tray 1 before attempting to print
from other trays.
ENWW Load paper and print media 27
Tray 1 holds up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) media or five envelopes, ten transparencies, or ten cards.
You can use tray 1 to print the first page on media different from the remainder of the document.
Media guides ensure that the media is correctly fed into the product and that the print is not skewed
(crooked on the media). When loading media, adjust the media guides to match the width of the media
that you are using.
Tray 2 or 3
Tray 2 and optional tray 3 hold up to 250 pages of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper, or fewer pages of heavier
media (25 mm (0.9 in) or less stack height). Load media with the top forward and the side to be printed
on facing down.
Media guides ensure that the media feeds correctly into the product and that the print is not skewed.
Tray 2 has side and rear media guides. When loading media, adjust the media guides to match the
length and width of the media that you are using.
28 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
NOTE: When you add new media, make sure that you remove all of the media from the input tray and
straighten the stack of new media. Do not fan the media. This reduces jams by preventing multiple
sheets of media from feeding through the product at one time.
Configure trays
When using one of the trays for a specific size of paper, you can set the default size for the tray in
HP ToolboxFX or from the control panel. In HP ToolboxFX, select Paper handling, and then select the
size for the tray you want to set. When you select that size of paper for a print job in the print dialog, the
product automatically selects that tray for printing.
To set the default paper size or type from the control panel, complete the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow keys to select Paper setup, and then press OK.
4. Use the arrow keys to select the tray to be configured, and then press OK.
5. Use the arrow keys to select either Paper type or Paper size, and then press OK.
6. Use the arrow keys to select a default type or size for the tray, and then press OK.
Change tray selection
The product is set to automatically pull media from trays that contain media. The product always pulls
media from tray 1 if you insert media into tray 1. If there is no media in tray 1, the product attempts to
pull media from tray 3, if installed, and then from tray 2.
You can specify which tray you want to use by changing the tray selection. Auto select, Tray 1, Tray
2, and Tray 3 are available settings. Auto select will pull media from the first available tray with the
appropriate matching media loaded.
NOTE: Tray 3 is only available if a tray 3 is installed.
Change the tray selection for the current job
1. On the product control panel, press Tray Select.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select the input tray that you want to use.
3. Press Start Copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or press OK to save the
selection without starting the job.
Change the default tray selection
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Def. Tray Select, and then press OK.
4. Use the arrow buttons to select a tray setting, and then press OK.
ENWW Load paper and print media 29
Install memory DIMMs
Information
The product comes with 64 MB of RAM and can be upgraded to 320 MB via the DIMM slot, which is
accessible from the left side of the product.
Install a memory DIMM
CAUTION: Handling a DIMM without wearing a grounded, antistatic device might damage the DIMM.
Touch any metal part of the product or other grounded metal before touching the DIMM.
1. Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug all of the cables and cords connected
to the product.
2. Open the DIMM door.
3. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic bag it came in, grasping the DIMM on the top edge.
30 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
4. With the gold contacts facing upward, insert the DIMM in the DIMM seat and press the DIMM body
in until the metal retaining pins click.
5. Close the DIMM door.
6. Reconnect all cables and cords, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.
7. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the Memory section shows the new memory amount.
See Product information pages and reports on page 237.
ENWW Install memory DIMMs 31
32 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
3 Maintenance
●Manage supplies
●Clean the product
●Manage the product
ENWW 33
Manage supplies
This section describes replacing the print cartridge, staple cassette, tray 2 pickup roller, and the tray 2
and optional tray 3 separation pad. For information about replacing the ADF pickup-roller assembly, see
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 110.
Inspect any parts that wear when servicing the product. Replace them as needed, based on failure or
wear rather than usage.
The following table lists approximate schedules for replacing consumables.
Life expectancies of supplies and the product
Item Capacity
HP LaserJet M2727 MFP Series Recommended maximum of 3,000 pages per month
Print cartridge 3,500 pages
1
(standard)
7,000 pages
1
(high-capacity)
Staple cassette 1,500 staples
1The estimated print cartridge life is based on using letter- or A4-sized media with an average of 5% toner coverage and a
medium density setting. Print cartridge life can be extended by using draft-mode settings to conserve toner.
Order supplies
NOTE: To locate part numbers for supplies, see Accessories and ordering information
on page 247.
To order supplies, go to one of the following Web sites.
●North America: www.hp.com/go/orders/supplies-na
●Europe and Middle East: www.hp.com/go/orders/supplies-emea
●Asia Pacific countries/regions: www.hp.com/go/orders/supplies-ap
●Latin America: www.hp.com/go/orders/supplies-la
34 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Store print cartridges
Follow these guidelines for storing print cartridges:
●Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few
minutes.
●Make sure that you store print cartridges in accordance with the environmental operating and
storage specifications in this manual. See Environmental specifications on page 325.
●Store the print cartridges in a horizontal position.
●Store the print cartridges in a dark, dry location away from heat and magnetic sources.
Replace and recycle supplies
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinf/community/environment/productinfo/saftey for
information about the following environmental topics:
●Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●Hewlett Packard's commitment to the environment
●Hewlett-Packard's environmental management system
●Hewlett Packard's end-of-life product return and recycling program
●Material safety data sheets (MSDSs), which are also available at: www.hp.com/go/msds, contain
information about supplies that contain chemical substances, such as toner.
It's easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are
environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, operation, and recycling
processes. We ensure that returned HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them
to recover valuable plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from
landfills. Because this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to
you. Empty HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled responsibly when you participate in the HP Planet
Partners program. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
In many countries/regions, this product's printing supplies (for example, the print cartridge) can be
returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-to-use and
free take-back program is available in more than 35 countries/regions. Multi-lingual program information
and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge. In 2004, HP Planet
Partners for LaserJet Supplies was available in 85% of the world market where HP LaserJet supplies
are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP
LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site
www.hp.com/go/recycle.
Use the label to return empty, original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for
non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty returns. Printing supplies or other
objects that are inadvertently sent to the HP Planet Partners program cannot be returned.
ENWW Manage supplies 35
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2004 through the HP Planet
Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge
materials diverted from landfills. In 2004, HP recycled an average of 59% of the print cartridge by weight
consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and metals are used to make new products such as
HP products, plastic trays and spools. The remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally
responsible manner.
U.S. returns
For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP encourages the use
of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single, pre-paid, pre-
addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in the U.S., call
1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/recycle.
Non-U.S. returns
Non-U.S. customers should visit the www.hp.com/go/recycle Web site for further information regarding
availability of the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers, when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide, which you can view on the Web at www.hp.com/support/
ljpaperguide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains a battery and contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp or scanner that might
require special handling at end-of-life.
Type: Lithium carbon monofluoride (solid button cell)
Weight: Approximately .1 gram
Location: On formatter PC board (one battery per product)
User removable: No
36 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Replace print cartridge
1. Open the print-cartridge door.
2. Grasp the handle on the print cartridge and then pull the cartridge straight out to remove it. See
the recycling information inside the print cartridge box.
3. Remove the new print cartridge from its packaging, remove the orange cover from the print
cartridge, and then pull the orange tab straight out to remove the sealing tape.
4. Insert the cartridge into the product until it is firmly in place.
ENWW Manage supplies 37
5. Close the print-cartridge door.
CAUTION: If toner gets on any clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothing in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into the fabric.
38 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Load staples
Each staple cassette holds 1,500 unformed staples.
1. Open the stapler door.
NOTE: Opening the stapler door disables the stapler.
Instructions and replacement staples part numbers are listed on the stapler door.
2. If you are replacing a staple cassette (for example, if the staple cassette has run out of staples),
remove the staple cassette from the product.
3. Insert a new staple cassette into the opening inside the stapler door.
4. Close the stapler door.
ENWW Manage supplies 39
Replace the tray 2 pickup roller
CAUTION: Failure to correctly complete this procedure might cause damage to the product.
1. Perform the following tasks before beginning this procedure:
●Turn off the product and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
●Open the print-cartridge door and remove the print cartridge.
●Remove the tray 2 cassette.
●Lift the product off of tray 3, if that tray is installed.
2. Place the product on its back on the work surface, with the front facing up.
WARNING! When you move the product into this position, the scanner cover can open suddenly
and be damaged. You must support the scanner cover to keep it from opening.
Figure 3-1 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 7)
40 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
3. Reach into the area that you exposed when you removed tray 2. Pull the white tabs outward, and
then rotate the roller-retaining collars up.
TIP: Push down on the green tab to release and lower the duplex assembly to expose more of
the roller.
Figure 3-2 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 7)
4. With the tab on the collar aligned with the slot in the plastic bracket, slide the collar to the right.
Leave the collar in this position for the remainder of this procedure.
Figure 3-3 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 7)
ENWW Manage supplies 41
5. Remove the pickup roller.
Figure 3-4 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (4 of 7)
6. Insert the left side of the replacement pickup-roller shaft into the left slot (callout 1), and then insert
the right side shaft (the side with the notch) into the right slot (callout 2).
Figure 3-5 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (5 of 7)
7. Rotate the roller shaft until the notch engages with the drive shaft and clicks into place.
42 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
8. Place the left retaining collar over the end of the roller shaft, align the tab on the collar with the slot
in the plastic bracket, and then slide the collar toward the pickup roller.
Figure 3-6 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (6 of 7)
9. With the tab on the right collar aligned with the slot on the plastic bracket, slide the collar towards
the pickup roller. Rotate the right and left retaining collars down into the locked position.
Figure 3-7 Replace the tray 2 pickup roller (7 of 7)
10. Push up on the duplex assembly until it locks into place. Place the product upright on the work
surface with the top of the product facing up.
ENWW Manage supplies 43
WARNING! When you move the product into this position, the scanner cover can open suddenly
and be damaged. You must support the scanner cover to keep it from opening.
11. Perform the following tasks after completing this procedure.
●Replace the product on tray 3, if that tray was installed.
●Replace the tray 2 cassette.
●Open the print-cartridge door and install the print cartridge.
●Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet, and turn on the product.
44 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Replace the tray 2 and optional tray 3 separation pad
1. Remove tray 2 or tray 3.
Figure 3-8 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (1 of 6)
2. Locate the separation pad.
Figure 3-9 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (2 of 6)
ENWW Manage supplies 45
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 3-10 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (3 of 6)
4. Remove the separation pad.
CAUTION: Before you remove the separation pad, take note of how it is positioned in the tray.
Figure 3-11 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (4 of 6)
46 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
5. Install the replacement separation pad.
Figure 3-12 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (5 of 6)
6. Replace the two screws, and then return the tray to the product.
Figure 3-13 Replace the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad (6 of 6)
ENWW Manage supplies 47
HP policy on non-HP supplies
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their
quality. Service or repairs required as a result of using a non-HP supply will not be covered under the
warranty.
When you insert a supply into the product, the product will inform you if the supply is not a genuine
HP supply. If you insert a genuine HP supply that has reached the low state from another HP device,
the product identifies the supply as non-HP. Simply return the supply to the original device to reactivate
the HP features and functionality.
Reset the product for non-HP supplies
When you install a non-HP print cartridge, Unauthorized appears on the control-panel display. In order
to print with this supply, you must press OK when you install this non-HP supply.
CAUTION: The product will not stop printing when this type of supply is empty. Damage to the product
could occur if the product prints with an empty non-HP print cartridge. See Hewlett-Packard limited
warranty statement on page 319 and Print cartridge limited warranty statement on page 321.
HP fraud hotline
Call the HP fraud hotline if the product or HP ToolboxFX indicates that the print cartridge is not an
HP print cartridge and you think that it is genuine. HP will help determine if the product is genuine and
take steps to resolve the problem.
The print cartridge might not be a genuine HP product if you notice the following issues:
●You are experiencing a large number of problems with the print cartridge.
●The print cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the pull tab or the box is different).
In the United States, call toll-free: 1-877-219-3183.
Outside the United States, you can call collect. Dial the operator and ask to place a collect call to this
telephone number: 1-770-263-4745. If you do not speak English, a representative at the HP fraud hotline
who speaks your language will assist you. Or, if someone who speaks your language is not available,
a language line interpreter will connect approximately one minute after the beginning of the call. The
language line interpreter is a service that will translate between you and the representative for the HP
fraud hotline.
48 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Clean the product
Clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the product.
Clean the flatbed scanner glass
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the
accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy.
NOTE: If streaks or other defects appear only on copies produced from the ADF, clean the ADF
scanner glass (step 3). It is not necessary to clean the flatbed scanner glass.
1. Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and raise the scanner cover.
2. Clean the glass by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass
cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the product, as they can damage the product. Do not place liquids
directly on the glass. They might seep under it and damage the product.
Figure 3-14 Clean the scanner glass (1 of 2)
ENWW Clean the product 49
3. Clean the ADF scanner glass by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
Figure 3-15 Clean the scanner glass (2 of 2)
50 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Clean the scanner-cover backing
1. Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and raise the scanner cover.
2. Clean the white scanner-cover backing by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened
with mild soap and warm water. Also, clean the ADF scanner glass (callout 1) next to the flatbed
scanner glass.
Figure 3-16 Clean the scanner-cover backing
1
3. Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.
4. Dry the backing by using a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION: Do not use paper-based wipes because they might scratch the backing.
5. If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps and use isopropyl alcohol
to dampen the cloth or sponge, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove
any residual alcohol.
ENWW Clean the product 51
Clean the tray 2 pickup roller
1. Perform the removal steps from Replace the tray 2 pickup roller on page 40.
2. Gently wipe the roller with a lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Figure 3-17 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 6)
3. Use a dry lint-free cloth to wipe the roller and remove loosened dirt.
Figure 3-18 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 6)
4. Allow the roller to dry completely before you reinstall it.
Figure 3-19 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 6)
52 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
5. Insert the left side of the pickup-roller shaft into the left slot (callout 1), and then insert the right side
of the shaft (the side with the notch) into the right slot (callout 2).
Figure 3-20 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (4 of 6)
6. Rotate the roller shaft until the notch engages with the drive shaft and clicks into place.
7. Place the left retaining collar over the end of the roller shaft, align the tab on the collar with the slot
in the plastic bracket, and then slide the collar toward the pickup roller.
Figure 3-21 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (5 of 6)
ENWW Clean the product 53
8. With the tab on the right collar aligned with the slot on the plastic bracket, slide the collar towards
the pickup roller. Rotate the right and left retaining collars down into the locked position.
Figure 3-22 Clean the tray 2 pickup roller (6 of 6)
9. Push up on the duplex assembly until it locks into place, and then place the product upright on the
work surface with the top of the product facing up.
WARNING! When you move the product into this position, the scanner cover can open suddenly
and be damaged. You must support the scanner cover to keep it from opening.
10. Perform the following tasks after completing this procedure.
●Replace the product on tray 3, if that tray was installed.
●Replace the tray 2 cassette.
●Open the print-cartridge door and install the print cartridge.
●Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet, and turn on the product.
54 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly
1. Turn off the product and unplug the power cord.
Figure 3-23 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (1 of 5)
2. Open the ADF cover.
Figure 3-24 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (2 of 5)
3. Rotate the assembly upward. Wipe it clean and rotate the rollers until the assembly is clean.
Figure 3-25 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (3 of 5)
ENWW Clean the product 55
4. Lower the green lever and the roller assembly and close the ADF cover.
Figure 3-26 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (4 of 5)
5. Plug in the product, and then turn it on.
Figure 3-27 Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly (5 of 5)
Clean the paper path
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. This product has
a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems.
Specks Smearing
56 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Clean the paper path from HP ToolboxFX
Use HP ToolboxFX to clean the paper path. This is the recommended cleaning method. If you do not
have access to HP ToolboxFX, use the method in Clean the paper path from the product control panel
on page 57.
1. Make sure that the product is turned on and in the Ready state, and that media is loaded in tray 1
or tray 2.
2. Open HP ToolboxFX, click the product, and then click the System Settings tab.
3. Click the Service tab, and then click Start.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.
Clean the paper path from the product control panel
If you do not have access to HP ToolboxFX, you can print and use a cleaning page from the product
control panel.
1. Press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select the Service menu, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Cleaning mode, and then press OK.
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.
5. Press OK again to confirm and begin the cleaning process.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.
ENWW Clean the product 57
Manage the product
HP ToolboxFX
The HP ToolboxFX is a Web-based program that you can use to complete the following tasks:
●Check the product status.
●Configure the product settings.
●View problem-solving information.
●View online documentation.
You can view the HP ToolboxFX when the product is directly connected to your computer or when it is
connected to the network. You must perform a typical software installation to use HP ToolboxFX.
NOTE: The HP ToolboxFX is not supported for Windows 98 SE or Macintosh operating systems. To
use the HP ToolboxFX, the TCP/IP protocol must be installed on the computer. You do not have to have
Internet access to open and use the HP ToolboxFX.
View the HP ToolboxFX
Open the HP ToolboxFX in one of these ways:
●In the Windows system tray or on the desktop, double-click the HP ToolboxFX icon.
●On the Windows Start menu, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), click HP, click
HP LaserJet M2727, and then click HP ToolboxFX.
The HP ToolboxFX software contains the following tabs, and the information about each tab is on the
specified page:
●Status on page 58
●Alerts on page 59
●Fax on page 59
●Help (Documentation) on page 62
●System settings on page 63
●Print settings on page 65
●Network settings on page 66
Status
The HP ToolboxFX Status tab contains links to the following main pages:
●Device Status. View product status information. This page indicates product conditions such as
a jam or an empty tray. After you correct a problem with the product, click Refresh Status to update
the product status.
●Supplies Status. View detailed supplies status, such as the estimated percentage of toner
remaining in the print cartridge and the number of pages that have been printed with the current
print cartridge. This page also has links to order supplies and to find recycling information.
58 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
●Device configuration. View a detailed description of the current product configuration, including
the amount of memory that is installed and whether optional trays are installed.
●Network configuration. View a detailed description of the current network configuration, including
the IP address and network status.
●Print Info Pages. Print the Configuration page and various other information pages that are
available for the product, such as the Supplies Status page and the Demo page.
●Event Log. View a history of product errors. The most recent error is at the top of the list.
Event log
The Event log is a four-column table where the product events are logged for your reference. The log
contains codes that correspond to the error messages that appear on the product control-panel display.
The number in the Page Count column specifies the total number of pages that the product had printed
when the error occurred. The Event log also contains a brief description of the error. For more information
about error messages, see Control-panel messages on page 169.
Alerts
The HP ToolboxFX Alerts tab contains links to the following main pages:
●Set up Status Alerts. Set up the product to send pop-up alerts for certain events, such as low
toner levels.
●Set up E-mail Alerts. Set up the product to send e-mail alert messages for certain events, such
as low toner levels.
Set up status alerts
Use HP ToolboxFX to set up the product so that it issues pop-up alerts when certain events occur.
Events that trigger alerts include jams, low levels of toner in HP print cartridges, non-HP print cartridge
in use, empty input trays, and specific error messages.
Select the pop-up format, the tray icon format, or both for the alerts. The pop-up alerts only appear when
the product is printing from the computer on which you set up the alerts.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Set up e-mail alerts
Use HP ToolboxFX to configure up to two e-mail addresses to receive alerts when certain events occur.
You can specify different events for each e-mail address. Specify the information for the e-mail server
that will send out the e-mail alert messages for the product.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Fax
Use the HP ToolboxFX Fax tab to perform fax tasks from the computer. The Fax tab contains links to
the following main pages:
●Fax Tasks. Perform such tasks as sending a fax or clearing the fax memory, or set the fax receive
mode.
●Fax Phone Book. Add, edit, or delete entries in the product phone book.
ENWW Manage the product 59
●Fax Send Log. View all of the recent faxes that have been sent from the product.
●Fax Receive log. View all of the recent faxes that have been received by the product.
●Fax Dat Properties. Manage the space used to store faxes on a computer. These settings apply
only if you have chosen to send or receive faxes remotely from the computer.
Fax tasks
The following three options are available when receiving a fax:
●Print the fax. You can select an option to have a message appear on a computer to notify you
when a fax is printed.
●Receive the fax on your computer. You can select an option to have a message appear on a
computer to notify you when a fax arrives. If the fax machine is connected to multiple computers,
only one computer can be designated to receive faxes.
●Forward the fax to another fax machine.
For more information about fax tasks, see Fax on page 59.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Fax phone book
Use the HP ToolboxFX Fax phone book to add and remove individuals or groups on a speed-dial list,
import phone books from a variety of sources, and update and maintain a contact list.
●To add an individual contact to a speed-dial list:
1. Select the check box next to the speed dial number that you want to specify.
2. Type the contact name in the Contact Name window.
3. Type the fax number in the Fax number window.
4. Click Add/Edit.
●To add a group of contacts to a speed-dial list:
1. Select the check box next to the speed-dial number that you want to specify.
2. Click New/Edit Group.
3. Double-click a contact name from the list on the left to move it to the group list on the right, or
select a name on the left and then click the appropriate arrow to move it to the group list on
the right. You can also use these two methods to move names from right to left.
4. When you have created a group, type a name in the Group name window, and then click
OK.
●To edit an existing individual speed-dial entry:
1. Click anywhere on the row that contains the contact name to select it.
2. Type changes in the appropriate windows, and then click Add/Edit.
You can also make changes directly in the phone book directory list by clicking the entry and
typing your changes. Make sure that you do not have a check mark in the Select column.
60 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
●To edit an existing group speed-dial entry:
1. Click anywhere on the row containing the group name to select it, and then click New/Edit
Group.
2. Make any required changes, and then click OK.
You can make changes to the name of the group directly in the phone book directory list by
clicking the entry and typing your changes. Make sure that you do not have a check mark in
the Select column.
●To delete an entry from the speed-dial list: Select the item and then click Delete.
●To move speed-dial entries:
1. Select the entry and then click Move, or you can select Move and then specify the entry in
the dialog box.
2. Select Next empty row, or specify the number of the row where you want to move the entry.
NOTE: If you specify a row that is occupied, the new entry will overwrite the existing entry.
●To import contacts from a phone book that exists in Lotus Notes, Outlook, or Outlook Express:
1. Click Import Phone Book.
2. Select the appropriate software program, navigate to the appropriate file, and then click OK.
You can also select individual entries from the phone book instead of importing the entire
phone book.
●To select all of the entries in your speed-dial list: Click the Select column heading.
In addition to numerical digits, the following are valid characters for fax numbers:
●(
●)
●+
●-
●*
●#
●R
●W
●.
●,
●<space>
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
ENWW Manage the product 61
Fax send log
The HP ToolboxFX Fax send log lists all recently sent faxes and information about them, including the
date and time sent, job number, fax number, page count, and the results.
When you send a fax from a computer that is connected to the product, the fax contains a View link.
Click this link to open a new page that provides information about the fax.
Click any column heading in the Fax send log to re-sort the information in that column in ascending or
descending order.
The Results column shows the status of the fax. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column
provides a description of why the fax was not sent.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
For more information about faxes, see Fax on page 59.
Fax receive log
The HP ToolboxFX Fax receive log provides a list of all recently received faxes and information about
them, including the date and time received, job number, fax number, page count, results, and an
abbreviated fax image.
When you receive a fax on a computer that is connected to the product, the fax contains a View link.
Click this link to open a new page that provides information about the fax.
Click on any column heading in the Fax receive log to re-sort the information in that column in ascending
or descending order.
The Results column provides the status of the fax. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column
provides a description of why the fax was not received.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Help (Documentation)
The HP ToolboxFX Documentation tab contains links to the following main pages:
●Troubleshooting
●How do I? View the How Do I? Help for help with specific tasks.
●Animated Demonstrations
●User Guide. View information about the product usage, warranty, specifications, and support. The
user guide is available in both HTML and PDF format.
●Install Notes. View important information about the product that is not available in the user guide.
The late-breaking Install Notes contain last-minute information about the product (in English only).
62 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
System settings
The HP ToolboxFX System Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:
●Device information. View information about the product, such as the product description and a
contact person.
●Paper handling. Change the product paper-handling settings, such as default paper size and
default paper type.
●Print quality. Change the product print-quality settings.
●Paper types. Change the product mode settings for a each media type, such as letterhead,
prepunched, or glossy paper.
●System setup. Change the product system settings, such as product language and jam recovery.
●Service. Gain access to various procedures that help you maintain the product.
●Device polling. Change the product polling settings, which determine how often HP ToolboxFX
collects data from the product.
●Save/restore settings. Save the current settings for the product to a file on your computer. Use
this file to load the same settings onto another product or to restore these settings to this product
at a later time.
Device information
The HP ToolboxFX Device information page stores data about your product for future reference. The
information that you type in these fields appears on the Configuration page. You can type any character
in each of these fields.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
ENWW Manage the product 63
Paper handling
Use the HP ToolboxFX paper-handling options to configure your default settings. These are the same
options that are available on the Paper Handling and Printing menus on the control panel.
You must set the asset number. The asset number is not set at the factory. This number is stored in the
product for identification purposes.
Three options are available for handling print jobs when the product is out of media:
●Select Wait for paper to be loaded.
●Select Cancel from the Paper out action drop-down list to cancel the print job.
●Select Override from the Paper out time drop-down list to send the print job to another paper tray.
The Paper out time field specifies how long the product waits before acting on your selections. You
can specify from 0 to 3600 seconds.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Print quality
Use the HP ToolboxFX print-quality options to improve the appearance of your print jobs. These are the
same options that are available on the Print Quality menu on the control panel.
The four options provided for controlling print quality are resolution, REt (Resolution Enhancement
technology), print density, and Economode.
●Resolution. Select 600 resolution for average print jobs and Fast Res 1200 for higher-quality print
jobs. Select ProRes 1200 for the highest-quality print job, but a longer printing time.
●REt. You can turn on REt, which HP provides for improved print quality.
●Print density. For increased print density, select a higher number. For decreased print density,
select a lower number.
●Economode. Turn Economode on when you are printing average print jobs. Economode reduces
print quality, but increases the life of your print cartridge. To increase print quality, turn Economode
off. HP does not recommend full-time use of Economode.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Paper types
Use the HP ToolboxFX paper-types options to configure print modes that correspond to the various
media types. When you select Restore Modes, all of the modes are reset to the factory settings.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
64 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
System setup
Use the HP ToolboxFX system-settings options to configure the settings for printing, faxing, copying,
and scanning. These are the same options that are available on the System Settings menu on the
control panel.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Service
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. HP ToolboxFX
provides an easy method for cleaning the paper path. For more information, see Clean the paper path
on page 56.
Device Polling
You can turn off HP ToolboxFX device polling to reduce network traffic, but you will also disable some
HP ToolboxFX features: pop-up alerts, fax log updates, the ability to receive faxes to this computer, and
scanning using the Scan To button.
To turn device polling on, do both of the following tasks:
●Clear Turn off device polling in HP ToolboxFX.
●Turn on one of the disabled device-polling features in HP ToolboxFX.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Print settings
The HP ToolboxFX Print Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:
●Printing. Change the default product print settings, such as number of copies and paper
orientation.
●PCL5e. View and change the PCL5e settings.
●PostScript. View and change the PS settings.
Printing
Use the HP ToolboxFX printing-settings options to configure the settings for all print functions. These
are the same options that are available on the Print Settings menu on the control panel.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
ENWW Manage the product 65
PCL 5e
Use the PCL5e options to configure the settings when you are using the PCL5e print personality. These
are the same options that are available on the PCL5e menu on the control panel.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
PostScript
Use the PostScript option when you are using the PostScript print personality. When the Print
PostScript error option is turned on, the PostScript error page automatically prints when PostScript
errors occur.
NOTE: You must click Apply before changes take effect.
Network settings
The network administrator can use the HP ToolboxFX Network Settings tab to control the network-
related settings for the product when it is connected to an IP-based network.
Embedded Web server
This product is equipped with an embedded Web server (EWS), which provides access to information
about product and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which Web programs
can run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment
for programs to run on a computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Safari, or Netscape Navigator.
An “embedded” Web server resides on a hardware device (such as an HP LaserJet product) or in
firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an EWS is that it provides an interface to the product that anyone with a network-
connected product and computer can use. There is no special software to install or configure, but you
must have a supported Web browser on the computer. To gain access to the EWS, type the IP address
for the product in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page.
For more information about printing a configuration page, see Product information pages and reports
on page 237.)
NOTE: For Macintosh operating systems, you can use the EWS over a USB connection after installing
the Macintosh software included with the product.
Features
The EWS allows you to view product and network status and manage printing functions from a computer.
With the EWS, you can complete the following tasks:
●View product status information.
●Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●View and change part of the product configuration.
●View and print some internal pages.
●Select the language in which to display the EWS pages.
66 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
●View and change network configuration.
●Set, change, or clear the product security password.
NOTE: Changing network settings in the EWS might disable some product software or features.
Secure the embedded Web server
Use the EWS to set a password.
1. Open the EWS, and then click the System tab.
2. Click Password.
3. In the Password box, type the password you want to set, and then in the Confirm password box,
type the same password again to confirm your choice.
4. Click Apply to save the password.
Macintosh Configure Device (Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later)
Macintosh Configure Device is a Web-based program that provides access to information about the
product (for example, information about supplies status and product settings). Use Macintosh Configure
Device to monitor and manage the product from the computer
NOTE: You must perform a complete software installation to use Macintosh Configure Device.
●Check the product status and print information pages.
●Check and change product system settings.
●Check default print settings.
●Check and change fax settings, including fax send, fax receive, fax phone book and speed-dial
settings, and fax reports.
●Check and change network settings, including IP configuration, Advanced, mDNS, SNMP, network
configuration, and password.
You can view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is directly connected to your computer or
when it is connected to the network.
NOTE: You do not have to have Internet access to open and use Macintosh Configure Device.
To view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is directly connected to the computer
1. Open HP Director by clicking the HP Director icon in the dock.
2. In HP Director, click Settings.
3. Select Configure device to open the Macintosh Configure Device home page in a browser.
To view Macintosh Configure Device when the product is connected to a network
1. Open one of the following supported Web browsers:
●Safari 1.2 or later
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
ENWW Manage the product 67
●Netscape Navigator 4.75 or later
●Opera 6.05 or later
2. Type the IP address of the product into the Web browser to open the Macintosh Configure Device
home page.
68 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
4 Theory of operation
●Basic operation
●Scanner and ADF functions and operation
●Internal components (base unit)
●Engine control system
●Laser/scanner system
●Pickup/feed/delivery system
●Image-formation system
●Fax functions and operation
ENWW 69
Basic operation
This chapter presents an overview of the relationships between major components in the product, and
includes a detailed discussion of the image-formation system. The following systems are discussed:
●Engine control system
●Laser/scanner system
●Pickup/feed/delivery system
●Image-formation system
Figure 4-1 HP LaserJet M2727 MFP system block diagram
Sequence of operation for the base unit
Operational sequences are controlled by the microprocessor and the DC controller.
Table 4-1 Sequence of operation
Name Timing Purpose
WAIT From power-on until the end of the main-motor initial
drive
Detects the presence of a print cartridge; clears
potential from the drum surface and cleans the
transfer roller
See Table 4-2 Power-on sequence on page 71 for
a complete description of the WAIT (power-on)
period.
STBY (standby) From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period until either
a print command is sent from the formatter or the
power is turned off
Prepares the product to receive print commands
INTR (initial
rotation)
From the time of the print command until the pickup
solenoid is turned on
Prepares the photosensitive drum for printing
70 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Name Timing Purpose
PRINT From the end of the INTR period until the primary
high-voltage is turned off
Forms the image on the photosensitive drum and
transfers the toner image to the media
LSTR (last
rotation)
From the end of the PRINT period (when high-voltage
is turned off) until the main motor stops rotating
Delivers the last page of a print job
After LSTR, the product either returns to STBY or, if
another print command was sent from the formatter,
enters INTR.
Table 4-2 Power-on sequence
Step Action
1Power-on
2CPU initialization
3Start video interface communication
4Check sensors for residual media
5Main motor initial drive
6Fuser heater initial drive. The fuser heater reaches a surface temperature of 100o C.
7Laser/scanner motor initial drive
8High-voltage control
Detect presence of a print cartridge
Clean the transfer roller after the primary charging AC bias is turned on
9Failure/abnormality check: detect laser/scanner failure, fuser failure, and open covers
10 Communication with the memory tag
Table 4-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
ENWW Basic operation 71
Scanner and ADF functions and operation
The following sections describe how the document scanner and the automatic document feeder (ADF)
function.
Scanner functions
The scanner uses a light source, a color-separation method, and a charge-coupled device array (CCD)
to collect optical information about the document and transform that into an image file. The scanner
consists of these elements:
●A lamp (LED)
●Five mirrors and a lens
●A CCD
Figure 4-2 Optical system
Lens
LED Lamp
Scanner Glass
600 ppi CCD
The scanner lamp illuminates a small strip of the document (called the raster line). The mirrors direct
the light through the lens to the CCD. The CCD senses and records the light, creating an analog
representation of the raster line. If the ADF is being used, the document then advances in the ADF to
the next raster line. If the flatbed is being used, the scanner module advances to the next raster line.
This advancing and collection process continues to the end of the sheet.
The image data is collected in the motor controller board, where it is processed and sent to the formatter.
The formatter then handles the image data, outputting it as a copy, sending it through the Fax Card as
a fax , or directing it to the computer as scanner output.
The image data collected is 600 pixels per inch (ppi). Each pixel has 8 bits for each of the three colors
(256 gray scale levels for each color), or a total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).
72 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Scanner operation
At power-on and periodically at other times, the scanner assembly moves systematically to locate its
home position. It then calibrates to a white strip located under the glass at the right end of the scan tub.
If the product detects a document in the ADF when a copy or scan is initiated (from the software or the
control panel), the scan module moves to the left side of the scan tub and stops. The image is acquired
as the paper is fed through the ADF past the scanner module.
If no document is detected in the ADF, the scan module acquires the image from the flatbed glass while
slowly moving within the scan tub.
ADF operation
Standby (paper-loading) mode: In standby mode, the pickup roller is up and the stack-stop is down,
preventing the user from inserting the original document too far. When a document is inserted correctly,
the paper-present sensor detects its presence.
The standard operation of the ADF consists of the pick, feed, and lift steps.
Pick: When it receives a copy or scan command, the ADF motor engages the gear train to lower the
pickup-roller assembly and raise the stack-stop. The first roller, called the pre-pick roller, moves the top
few sheets forward into the ADF. The next roller is the pickup roller. This roller contacts the ADF
separation pad, which separates multiple pages into single sheets.
Feed: The single sheet continues through the path. Along the way, the form sensor, which is a set
distance from the ADF glass, detects the sheet. This alerts the scanner to start when the page reaches
the glass. The scanner acquires the image, one raster line at a time, until it detects the end of the page.
The page is then ejected. The pick and feed steps are repeated as long as paper is detected in the ADF
input tray.
Lift: When no more paper is detected in the ADF input tray and the form sensor detects the trailing edge
of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and the motor turns in a sequence that lifts the pick-roller
assembly to standby (paper-loading) mode again.
The ADF will not function when the ADF cover is open. The paper path is incomplete if the ADF cover
is lifted from the glass.
ENWW Scanner and ADF functions and operation 73
ADF paper path and ADF sensors
The following diagram shows the ADF paper path.
Figure 4-3 ADF paper path
PAGE EJECTS FULLY
OUTPUT AREA
ADF glass
Prescan rollers
INPUT TRAY
Form sensor
Postscan
rollers
Pre-pick roller
Picks top sheet
Stack stop
Pick roller Paper present sensor
ADF door
open flag
Separation pad
Cleanout
The paper-present sensor determines if paper is in the ADF. The form sensor detects the top and bottom
edges of the document. One other sensor detects an open ADF door.
74 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ADF jam detection
The ADF has two sensors that detect paper. The paper-present sensor detects the presence of media
in the ADF input tray. The form sensor detects media moving through the ADF. If a jam is detected, the
ADF immediately stops the paper feeding and a jam message appears on the control-panel display.
A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions:
●Document-feeder jam. When documents are detected in the ADF input tray, and a command to
copy, scan or fax is received, the scan module travels to the left side of the scan assembly and
stops beneath the ADF scanner glass. The ADF then attempts three times, or for about ten
seconds, to advance the paper to the form sensor. If the paper does not advance, the scan module
travels back to the home position on the right side of the scanner assembly. The message
Document feeder mispick. Reload. appears on the control-panel display.
●Long-document jam. If the paper has advanced to trigger the form sensor, but the trailing edge
is not detected within the time allowed for a 381-mm (15-inch) document (the maximum allowable
page length for the ADF), the scanner returns to the home position on the right side of the scanner
assembly. The message Doc feeder jam. Clear, Reload. appears on the control-panel display.
●Stall jam. When a page that is less than 381 mm (15 inches) long has advanced to the form sensor
but has not left it within the expected time, the paper has probably stalled or jammed. The scanner
returns to the home position on the right side of the scanner assembly. The message Doc feeder
jam. Clear, Reload. appears on the control-panel display.
●Other. If the paper stops in the ADF and the scan module remains under the ADF scanner glass,
an internal firmware error has probably occurred. This is usually remedied by cycling the power.
ENWW Scanner and ADF functions and operation 75
Internal components (base unit)
Figure 4-4 Cross-section of printer on page 76 highlights the major internal components.
Figure 4-4 Cross-section of printer
4
139
8
7
6
5
2
19 18 17 16 15 13
12
11 10
14
1Top output bin delivery roller
2Fuser film
3Laser/scanner
4Primary charging roller
5Developer roller
6Print cartridge
7Feed roller
8Multipurpose pickup roller
9Multipurpose separation pad
10 Separation pad
11 Pickup roller
12 Registration roller
13 Duplexer pickup roller
14 Registration shutter
76 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
15 Transfer roller
16 Photosensitive drum
17 Duplexer feed roller
18 Pressure roller
19 Rear output bin delivery roller
ENWW Internal components (base unit) 77
Engine control system
The engine control system coordinates all of the product functions, according to commands sent from
the formatter. It drives the laser/scanner system, the image-formation system, and the pickup/feed/
delivery system.
The engine control system contains the following components:
●Formatter
●High-voltage PCA
Figure 4-5 Engine control system
78 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-6 Engine-control-system circuit diagram
High-voltage
power supply
circuit
Pressure roller
AC input
circuit
Low-voltage power
supply circuit
Main motor
Solenoids
Sensors
Laser driver
BD sensor
IC201
CPU
Duplex driver
Fan motor drive
circuit
Fan
Option
Memory tag
Memory tag circuit
ECU PCA
Fuser control
Fuser
Transfer roller
Print cartridge
Formatter
Laser/scanner
motor
IC502
Reset IC
PCA
ENWW Engine control system 79
Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner system receives video signals from the DC controller and the formatter, and converts
the signals into latent images on the photosensitive drum.
Figure 4-7 Laser/scanner system
80 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup/feed/delivery system
The pickup/feed/delivery system consists of several types of feed rollers and sensors. The DC controller
uses two motors and two solenoids to drive the rollers. Three media-detection sensors detect media as
it passes through the printer. If media does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time period,
the DC controller determines that a jam has occurred and alerts the formatter.
The following components are identified in Figure 4-8 Pickup/feed/delivery system on page 82:
●M1, main motor
●SL1, tray 2 pickup solenoid
●SL2, tray 1 pickup solenoid
●SL3, duplex solenoid
●PS911, width-detection sensor
●PS912, top-of-page sensor
●PS913, width-detection sensor
●PS914, tray 2 media sensor
●PS915, fuser-delivery sensor and duplex sensor
ENWW Pickup/feed/delivery system 81
NOTE: This sensor has two sensor flags; one flag detects the media when it is delivered from
the fuser, and the other flag detects the media when it is reversed for duplexing.
Figure 4-8 Pickup/feed/delivery system
82 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Image-formation system
Laser printing requires the interaction of several technologies, including electronics, optics, and
electrophotographics, to produce a printed page. Each process functions independently and must be
coordinated with the other product processes. Image formation consists of the following five processes:
●Electrostatic latent-image formation
●Developing
●Transfer
●Fusing
●Drum cleaning
These five processes contain seven steps, which are shown in Figure 4-9 Image-formation system
on page 83 and described in the following sections.
Figure 4-9 Image-formation system
Step 1: Primary charging
DC and AC biases are applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers a uniform negative potential
to the photosensitive drum.
Figure 4-10 Primary charging
ENWW Image-formation system 83
Step 2: Laser beam exposure
The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize negative charges on parts of the drum. An
electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum where negative charges were neutralized.
Step 3: Developing
The developing cylinder comes in contact with the photosensitive drum to deposit toner onto the
electrostatic latent image.
NOTE: The charges on the exposed area of the drum are shown as positive in Figure 4-11 Developing
on page 84. The charges are actually negative, but they are more positive than the charges on the
developing cylinder.
Figure 4-11 Developing
Toner acquires a negative charge through friction from the developing cylinder and the blade. When the
negatively charged toner comes in contact with the drum, the toner adheres to the electrostatic latent
image. The image on the drum becomes visible because of the toner.
Step 4: Transfer
The transfer charging roller, to which a DC positive bias is applied, imparts a positive charge on the print
media. When the print media comes in contact with the photosensitive drum, the toner is transferred to
the print media.
84 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-12 Transfer
Step 5: Separation
The elasticity of the print media causes its separation from the photosensitive drum. A static-charge
eliminator aids separation by weakening any electrostatic adhesion.
Figure 4-13 Separation
Step 6: Fusing
The DC negative bias applied to the fusing film strengthens the holding force of the toner on the print
media and prevents the toner from scattering.
ENWW Image-formation system 85
Figure 4-14 Fusing
Step 7: Drum cleaning
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off of the photosensitive drum and deposits it into the
waste-toner case.
Figure 4-15 Drum cleaning
86 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Fax functions and operation
The following sections describe the product fax capabilities.
Computer and network security features
The product can send and receive fax data over telephone lines that conform to public switch telephone
network (PSTN) standards. The secure fax protocols make it impossible for computer viruses to be
transferred from the telephone line to a computer or network.
The following product features prevent virus transmission:
●No direct connection exists between the fax line and any devices that are connected to the USB
or Ethernet ports.
●The internal firmware cannot be modified through the fax connection.
●All fax communications go through the fax subsystem, which does not use Internet data-exchange
protocols.
PSTN operation
The PSTN operates through a central office (CO) that generates a constant voltage on the TIP and
RING wires (48 V, usually). A device goes on-hook by connecting impedance (such as 600 ohms for
the U.S.) across the TIP and RING so that a line current can flow. The CO can detect this current and
can send impulses like dial tones. The product generates more signaling tones, such as dialing digits,
to tell the CO how to connect the call. The product can also detect tones, such as a busy tone from the
CO, that tell it how to behave.
When the call is finally connected, the CO behaves like a piece of wire connecting the sender and
receiver. This is the period during which all of the fax signaling and data transfer occurs. When a call is
completed, the circuit opens again and the line-current flow ceases, removing the CO connection from
both the sender and the receiver.
On most phone systems, the TIP and RING wires appear on pins 3 and 4 of the RJ-11 modular jack
(the one on the fax card). These two wires do not have to be polarized because all the equipment works
with either TIP or RING on pin 3 and the other wire on pin 4. This means that cables of either polarity
can interconnect and will still work.
These basic functions of PSTN operation are assumed in the design of the fax subsystem. The product
generates and detects the signaling tones, currents, and data signals that are required to transmit and
receive faxes on the PSTN.
Receive faxes when you hear fax tones
In general, incoming faxes to the product are automatically received. However, if other devices are
connected to the same phone line, the product might not be set to answer automatically.
If the product is connected to a phone line that receives both fax and phone calls, and you hear fax
tones when you answer the extension phone, receive the fax in one of two ways:
●If you are near the product, press Start Fax on the control panel.
●Press 1-2-3 in sequence on the extension phone keypad, listen for fax transmission sounds, and
then hang up.
ENWW Fax functions and operation 87
NOTE: In order for the 1-2-3 sequence to work, the extension phone setting must be set to On in the
Fax setup menu.
Distinctive ring function
Distinctive ring is a service that a telephone company provides. The distinctive ring service allows three
phone numbers to be assigned to one phone line. Each phone number has a distinctive ring. The first
phone number has a single ring, the second phone number has a double ring, and the third phone
number has a triple ring.
NOTE: The product has not been tested with all of the distinctive-ring services that telephone
companies provide in all countries/regions. HP does not guarantee that the distinctive-ring function will
operate correctly in all countries/regions. Contact the local phone service provider for assistance.
Set up the distinctive ring function
1. Press Setup. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup and then press OK.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax recv. setup and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Answer ring type and then press OK.
4. Use the arrow buttons to select one of the following options:
NOTE: The control-panel display might show some of these options as abbreviations.
●All rings (default setting)
●Single
●Double
●Triple
●DoubleTriple
Press OK to save the setting.
Fax by using Voice over IP services
Voice over IP (VoIP) services provide normal telephone service, including long distance service through
a broadband Internet connection. These services use packets to break up the voice signal on a
telephone line and transmit it digitally to the receiver, where the packets are reassembled. The VoIP
services are often not compatible with fax machines. The VoIP provider must state the service supports
fax over IP services.
Because the installation process varies, the VoIP service provider will have to assist in installing the
product fax component.
Although a fax might work on a VoIP network, it can fail when the following events occur:
●Internet traffic becomes heavy and packets are lost.
●Latency (the time it takes for a packet to travel from its point of origin to its point of destination)
becomes excessive.
88 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
If you experience problems using the fax feature on a VoIP network, ensure that all of the product cables
and settings are correct. Configuring the Fax Speed setting to Medium(V.17) or Slow(V.29) can also
improve your ability to send a fax over a VoIP network. See Table 6-8 Fax setup menu on page 194.
If you continue to have problems faxing, contact your VoIP provider.
The fax subsystem
The formatter, fax card, firmware, and software all contribute to the fax functionality. The designs of the
formatter and fax card, along with parameters in the firmware, determine the majority of the regulatory
requirements for telephony on the product.
The fax subsystem is designed to support V.34 fax transmission, lower speeds (such as V.17 fax), and
older fax machines.
Fax card in the fax subsystem
Two versions of the fax card are used in the HP LaserJet M2727 MFP. One is used in the North
American, South American, and Asian countries/regions. The other is used primarily in European
countries/regions.
The fax card contains the modem chipset (DSP and CODEC) that controls the basic fax functions of
tone generation and detection, along with channel control for fax transmissions. The CODEC and its
associated circuitry act as the third-generation silicon DAA to achieve compliance world-wide regulatory
requirements.
The only difference between the two versions is that each version is compliant with the 2/4-wire phone
jack system from the repective country/region.
Safety isolation
The most important function of the fax card is the safety isolation between the high-voltage, transient-
prone environment of the telephone network (TNV [telephone network voltage]) and the low-voltage
analog and digital circuitry of the formatter (SELV [secondary extra-low voltage]). This safety isolation
provides both customer safety and product reliability in the telecom environment.
Any signals that cross the isolation barrier do so magnetically. The breakdown voltage rating of barrier-
critical components is greater than 5 kV.
Safety-protection circuitry
In addition to the safety barrier, the fax card protects against over-voltage and over-current events.
Telephone over-voltage events can be either differential mode or common mode. The event can be
transient in nature (a lightning-induced surge or ESD) or continuous (a power line crossed with a phone
line). The fax card protection circuitry provides margin against combinations of over-voltage and over-
current events.
Common mode protection is provided by the selection of high-voltage-barrier critical components
(transformer and relay). The safety barrier of the fax card PCB traces and the clearance between the
fax card and surrounding components also contribute to common mode protection.
A voltage suppressor (a crowbar-type SIDACTOR) provides differential protection. This device becomes
low impedance at approximately 300 V differential, and crowbars to a low voltage. A series thermal
switch works in conjunction with the crowbar for continuous telephone line events, such as crossed
power lines.
ENWW Fax functions and operation 89
All communications cross the isolation barrier magnetically. The breakdown voltage rating of barrier-
critical components is greater than 5 kV.
Data path
TIP and RING are the two-wire paths for all signals from the telephone network. All signaling and data
information comes across them, including fax tones and fax data.
The telephone network uses DC current to determine the hook state of the telephone, so line current
must be present during a call. The silicon DAA provides a DC holding circuit to keep the line current
constant during a fax call.
The silicon DAA converts the analog signal to a digital signal for DSP processing, and also converts the
digital signal to an analog signal for transmitting data through a telephone line.
The magnetically coupled signals that cross the isolation barrier go either through a transformer or a
relay.
The DSP in the fax card communicates with the ASIC in the formatter using the high-speed serial
interface.
Hook state
Another magnetically coupled signal is the control signal that disconnects the downstream telephone
devices (such as a phone or answering machine). A control signal originating on the DSP can change
the relay state, causing the auxiliary jack (downstream jack) to be disconnected from the telephone
circuit.
The product takes control of calls that it recognizes as fax calls. If the product does not directly pick up
the call, it monitors incoming calls for the fax tone or for the user to direct it to receive a fax. This idle
mode is also called eavesdropping. This mode is active when the product is on-hook but current exists
in the downstream phone line because another device is off-hook. During eavesdropping, the receive
circuit is enabled but has a different gain from the current that is generated during normal fax
transmissions.
The product does not take control of the line unless it detects a fax tone or the user causes it to connect
manually. This feature allows the user to make voice calls from a phone that is connected to the product
without being cut off if a fax is not being received.
Downstream device detection
The line voltage monitoring module of the silicon DAA can detect the line state as well as the downstream
device. It tells DSP via DIB that an active device (telephone, modem, or answering machine) is
connected to the auxiliary port on the product (the right side of the RJ-11 jack). The DSP uses the signal
to ensure that the product does not go off-hook (and disconnect a downstream call) until it has been
authorized to do so (by a manual fax start or the detection of the appropriate tones).
Hook switch control
In the silicon DAA the CODEC controls the hook switch directly. The CODEC is activated when it
receives commands from the DSP. When the circuit is drawing DC current from the central office it is
considered off-hook. When no DC current flows the state is considered on-hook.
90 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Ring detect
Ring detect is performed by the line voltage monitoring module of the silicon DAA, and is a combination
of voltage levels and cadence (time on and time off). Both must be present to detect a valid ring. The
CODEC works with DSP as well as the firmware to determine if an incoming signal is an answerable
ring.
Line current control
The DC current from the CO needs to have a path to flow from TIP to RING. The DC impedance
emulation line modulator and DC terminations modules in the silicon DAA act as a DC holding circuit,
and works with the firmware to achieve the voltage-current characteristic between TIP and RING. The
impedance (the current-voltage characteristic) changes corresponding to certian special events, such
as pulse dialing or when the product goes on-hook.
Billing- (metering-) tone filters
Switzerland and Germany provide high-frequency AC signals on the phone line in order to bill customers.
A filter in a special fax cable (for certain countries/regions), can filter these signals. Because these
billings signals are not used in the U.S., these filters are not present in the U.S. fax cable.
To obtain a special fax cable, contact your local telephone service provider.
Fax page storage in flash memory
Fax pages are the electronic images of the document page. They can be created in any of three ways:
scanned to be sent to another fax machine, generated to be sent by the computer, or received from a
fax machine to be printed.
The product stores all fax pages in flash memory automatically. After these pages are written into flash
memory, they are stored until the pages are sent to another fax machine, printed on the product,
transmitted to the computer, or erased by the user.
These pages are stored in flash memory, which is the nonvolatile memory that can be repeatedly read
from, written to, and erased. The product has 8 MB of flash memory, of which 7.5 MB is available for
fax storage. The remaining 0.5 MB is used for the file system and reclamation. Adding RAM does not
affect the fax page storage because the product does not use RAM for storing fax pages.
Stored fax pages
The user can reprint stored fax receive pages in case of errors. For a fax send, the product will re-send
the fax in case of errors. The product will re-send stored fax pages after a busy signal, comm error, no
answer, or power failure. Other fax devices store fax pages in either normal RAM or short-term RAM.
Normal RAM immediately loses its data when power is lost, while short-term RAM loses its data about
60 minutes after power failure. Flash memory maintains its data for years without any applied power.
Advantages of flash memory storage
Fax pages that are stored in flash memory are persistent. They are not lost as a result of a power failure,
no matter how long the power is off. Users can reprint faxes in case the print cartridge runs out of toner
or the product experiences other errors while printing faxes.
The product also has scan-ahead functionality that makes use of flash memory. Scan-ahead
automatically scans pages into flash memory before a fax job is sent. This allows the sender to pick up
ENWW Fax functions and operation 91
the original document immediately after it is scanned, eliminating the need to wait until the fax is
transmission is complete.
Because fax pages are stored in flash memory rather than RAM, more RAM is available to handle larger
and more complicated copy and print jobs.
92 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
5 Removal and replacement
●Introduction
●External panels, covers, and doors
●Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly
●ADF scanner glass
●ADF assembly
●Scanner/ADF assembly
●Bezel and control panel
●Internal assemblies
ENWW 93
Introduction
This chapter documents the removal and replacement of field replaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes and tips are included to provide
directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures.
HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or problem-solving at the component level.
Note the length, diameter, color, type, and location of each screw. Be sure to return each screw to its
original location during reassembly.
Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can become
damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to locate. When replacing wire
harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides.
Removal and replacement strategy
WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting
to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, as well as damage to the
product. The power must be on for certain functional checks during problem solving. However, the power
supply should be disconnected during parts removal.
Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner
assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do
not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread
pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw hole
becomes stripped, repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly.
Electrostatic discharge
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD
reminder when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation
or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
User-replaceable parts
To remove and replace the tray 2 pickup roller or the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad, see Replace the
tray 2 pickup roller on page 40 or Replace the tray 2 and optional tray 3 separation pad on page 45.
94 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Required tools
●#2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length
●Small flatblade screwdriver
●#8 torx driver
●#10 torx driver
●Needle-nose pliers
●ESD mat (if one is available)
●Penlight (optional)
CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver (callout 2)
or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads.
CAUTION: Do not pull directly on the wires to disconnect them. Always pull on the plastic body of a
connector to avoid damaging the connector wires.
Figure 5-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison
Before performing service
●Remove all media from the product.
●Turn off the power using the power switch.
●Unplug the power cable and interface cable(s).
●Place the product on an ESD mat (if one is available). If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
●Remove the print cartridge. See Remove the print cartridge on page 99.
●Remove the tray 2 cassette.
●Lift the product off of the optional tray 3 (if it is installed).
ENWW Introduction 95
After performing service
●Return all media to the trays.
●Plug in the power cable.
●Reinstall the print cartridge.
●Reinstall the tray 2 cassette.
●Replace the product on the optional tray 3 (if present).
Post-service tests
After service has been completed, the following tests can be used to verify that the repair or replacement
was successful.
Test 1 (print-quality test)
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Ensure that the input tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable, and then turn on the product.
4. Verify that the expected start-up sounds occur.
5. Perform a control-panel test from the secondary service menu. Verify that the control-panel buttons
beep when they are pressed.
NOTE: If the control-panel buttons do not beep, verify that the user did not disable this function.
6. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur. See Product
information pages and reports on page 237.
7. Print a demo page, and then verify that the print quality is as expected. See Product information
pages and reports on page 237.
8. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
9. If necessary, restore any customer-specified settings.
10. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth.
Test 2 (copy-quality test)
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Ensure that the input tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable, and then turn on the product.
4. Verify that the expected start-up sounds occur.
5. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur. See Product
information pages and reports on page 237.
6. Place the configuration page in the ADF.
96 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7. Print a copy job, and then verify the results.
8. Place the configuration page on the scanner glass.
9. Print a copy job, and then verify the results.
10. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth.
Test 3 (fax-quality test)
1. Place the configuration page in the ADF.
2. Type a valid fax number and send the fax job.
3. Verify that the send quality and receive quality meet expectations.
ENWW Introduction 97
Parts removal order
Use the following diagram to determine which parts must be removed before removing other parts.
Figure 5-2 Parts-removal tree
ADF
Bezel and control panel
Convenience stapler cartridge
Print cartridge
Transfer roller
Right cover
Left cover Convenience stapler assembly
Convenience stapler inlet cable
Power switch PCAPrint-cartridge door
Top cover (Note: scanner assembly removed)
Rear cover Convenience stapler power supply
Convenience stapler bracket and strap
Note: Convenience stapler
components are only for the
HP LaserJet M2727nfs.
Registration assembly Scanner assembly
Speaker
Formatter
Duplex assembly
Laser/scanner assembly
Memory-tag reader assembly
Fan
Interlock assembly
Duplex-drive gears (Note: formatter removed)
Fuser
Main drive gears
Tray 2 pickup assembly
ECU (Note: interlock assembly removed)
Main motor
Note: some formatters
will include an Asian
character control panel
dispaly PCA.
98 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Remove the print cartridge
CAUTION: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothing in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into the fabric.
1. Open the print-cartridge door.
Figure 5-3 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2)
2. Grasp the handle on the print cartridge and then pull the cartridge straight out to remove it.
Figure 5-4 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2)
ENWW Introduction 99
External panels, covers, and doors
Right cover
1. Remove the staple cassette (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only).
Figure 5-5 Remove the right cover (1 of 4)
2. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release three tabs at the rear of the product.
Figure 5-6 Remove the right cover (2 of 4)
100 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release one tab at the bottom of the cover.
Figure 5-7 Remove the right cover (3 of 4)
4. Rotate the back of the cover away from the product, and then slide it forward to remove it.
Figure 5-8 Remove the right cover (4 of 4)
ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 101
Left cover
1. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release two tabs at the rear of the product.
Figure 5-9 Remove the left cover (1 of 3)
2. Release one tab at the bottom of the cover.
Figure 5-10 Remove the left cover (2 of 3)
102 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Rotate the back of the cover away from the product, and then slide it forward to remove it.
Figure 5-11 Remove the left cover (3 of 3)
ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 103
Print-cartridge door
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Open the print-cartridge door, and use a flatblade screwdriver to gently pry the cartridge-door arm
(callout 1) off of the print-cartridge door.
CAUTION: Be careful not to break the tabs on the cartridge-door arm.
Figure 5-12 Remove the print-cartridge door (1 of 3)
1
3. Close the print-cartridge door and remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-13 Remove the print-cartridge door (2 of 3)
2
104 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Lift the cartridge-door assembly up and straight away from the product.
Figure 5-14 Remove the print-cartridge door (3 of 3)
ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 105
Rear cover
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-15 Remove the rear cover (1 of 3)
1
3. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the duplex-drive assembly hinge (callout 2) on the
power-plug side of the assembly.
TIP: Be careful to not bend the hinge. Straighten the hinge if necessary.
Figure 5-16 Remove the rear cover (2 of 3)
2
106 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the duplex-drive assembly hinge (callout 3) on the
opposite side of the assembly from the power plug, and then separate the rear cover from the
product.
TIP: Be careful to not bend the hinge. Straighten the hinge if necessary.
Figure 5-17 Remove the rear cover (3 of 3)
3
NOTE: After removing the rear cover, the duplex assembly is disconnected at the rear of the product.
ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 107
Top cover
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
2. Open the print-cartridge door and loosen, but do not remove, one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-18 Remove the top cover (1 of 4)
1
3. Loosen, but do not remove, one screw (callout 2) on the opposite side.
Figure 5-19 Remove the top cover (2 of 4)
2
108 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Remove two screws (callout 3) from the back of the product.
Figure 5-20 Remove the top cover (3 of 4)
3
5. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then lift up on the top cover (callout 5) to remove it.
Figure 5-21 Remove the top cover (4 of 4)
4
5
ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 109
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly
1. Open the ADF cover.
Figure 5-22 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (1 of 6)
2. Release the ADF pickup-roller tension spring.
Figure 5-23 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (2 of 6)
2
11
110 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Push the pickup-roller assembly lever until the pickup-roller assembly snaps out of the chassis
(callout 1), and then lift up the ADF pickup-roller assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-24 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (3 of 6)
1
2
4. Rotate the end of the assembly away from the ADF (callout 3) and then slide it out of the ADF to
remove the assembly (callout 4).
Figure 5-25 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (4 of 6)
3
4
ENWW Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly 111
5. Install the replacement assembly.
Figure 5-26 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (5 of 6)
5
6
6. Reattach the ADF pickup-roller tension spring, and then close the ADF cover.
Figure 5-27 Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly (6 of 6)
1
112 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF scanner glass
CAUTION: Avoid touching the flatbed glass or the ADF separation pad. Skin oils and fingerprints can
contaminate the glass or pad and cause print-quality or paper-pickup problems.
1. Use a #10 torx screwdriver to remove one torx screw.
Figure 5-28 Removing the ADF scanner glass (1 of 3)
2. Carefully remove the plastic ADF scanner-glass frame.
Figure 5-29 Removing the ADF scanner glass (2 of 3)
ENWW ADF scanner glass 113
3. Slide the black glass-locking lever toward the back of the product to release the glass, and then
carefully remove the glass.
CAUTION: Avoid touching the flatbed glass or the ADF separation pad. Skin oils and fingerprints
can contaminate the glass or pad and cause print-quality or paper-pickup problems.
Figure 5-30 Removing the ADF scanner glass (3 of 3)
2
1
114 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF assembly
1. Open the scanner cover (it contains the ADF assembly).
Figure 5-31 Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 3)
2. Squeeze the locking tabs on the ADF wire-harness plug (callout 1), and then disconnect the plug
from the flatbed.
Figure 5-32 Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 3)
1
ENWW ADF assembly 115
3. Lift the scanner cover (containing the ADF assembly) straight up and off of the flatbed.
Figure 5-33 Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 3)
116 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Scanner/ADF assembly
1. Remove the left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Disconnect two FFC connectors (callout 1; J4 and J27), and two wire-harness connectors (callout 2;
J2 and J36) from the formatter. Disconnect one ground-wire terminal lug (callout 3) from the product
chassis.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also,
do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
Figure 5-34 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (1 of 4)
2
1
3
3. Remove one screw (callout 4) to remove the ferrite from the chassis (callout 5), and then feed the
cables out through the ferrite.
Figure 5-35 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (2 of 4)
4
5
ENWW Scanner/ADF assembly 117
4. Remove four screws (callout 6).
Figure 5-36 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (3 of 4)
6
5. Slide the scanner/ADF assembly toward the front of the base unit, and then lift it up to remove it.
WARNING! The scanner cover (which contains the ADF assembly) is not captive when the
scanner assembly is removed. The scanner cover can suddenly open and be damaged when you
are handling the scanner assembly. You must keep the scanner assembly level to make sure that
the scanner cover (ADF assembly) does not open.
CAUTION: Make sure that you carefully pass the scanner wire harnesses through the opening
in the top cover. The connectors can be damaged if they become caught on the top cover.
Figure 5-37 Remove the scanner/ADF assembly (4 of 4)
118 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Bezel and control panel
1. Gently pry up on the corner of the control-panel bezel, and then carefully lift it up and off of the
control panel to remove it.
NOTE: If you are only replacing the bezel, you can disregard the remaining steps in this
procedure. Use the following steps if you are also replacing the control panel.
Figure 5-38 Remove the bezel and control panel (1 of 4)
2. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-39 Remove the bezel and control panel (2 of 4)
1
ENWW Bezel and control panel 119
3. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the three locking tabs (callout 2) along the top of the
control panel.
Figure 5-40 Remove the bezel and control panel (3 of 4)
2
120 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Turn the control panel over and disconnect one FFC (callout 3).
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also,
do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
Figure 5-41 Remove the bezel and control panel (4 of 4)
3
TIP: When you reinstall the control panel, make sure that the tabs at the bottom of the panel
(callout 4) fit underneath the retainers in the scanner body.
4
ENWW Bezel and control panel 121
Internal assemblies
Convenience-stapler assembly (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
1. Remove the right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-42 Remove the convenience-stapler assembly (1 of 2)
1
122 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove two screws (callout 2), and then separate the stapler assembly from the chassis to remove
it.
Figure 5-43 Remove the convenience-stapler assembly (2 of 2)
2
TIP: When you reinstall the convenience-stapler assembly, make sure that the hook on the top
of the assembly bracket fits into the slot on the product chassis.
ENWW Internal assemblies 123
Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
1. Remove the right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) at the convenience-stapler assembly, and then remove one
screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-44 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (1 of 3)
1
2
3. Remove the sheet-metal strap, and then separate the convenience-stapler power supply from the
chassis.
Figure 5-45 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (2 of 3)
124 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Disconnect one connector and then remove the convenience-stapler power supply.
Figure 5-46 Remove the convenience-stapler power assembly (3 of 3)
ENWW Internal assemblies 125
Convenience-stapler AC inlet cable (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
1. Remove the right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1) to remove the convenience-stapler AC inlet cable.
Figure 5-47 Remove the convenience-stapler AC inlet cable
1
126 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Convenience-stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only)
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-stapler
power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 124.
NOTE: When you remove the convenience-stapler power supply, you also remove the
sheet-metal strap.
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then separate the sheet-metal bracket (callout 2) from the
product chassis to remove it.
Figure 5-48 Remove the convenience-stapler bracket and strap
1
2
ENWW Internal assemblies 127
Speaker
1. Remove the left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1; J2) from the fax card, remove three screws (callout 2), and remove
the fax card (callout 3).
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD
reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or
mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also,
do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
Figure 5-49 Remove the speaker (1 of 2)
2
1
3
3. Remove one screw (callout 4) and the metal plate (callout 5).
128 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 6), and then separate the speaker (callout 7) from the product.
Figure 5-50 Remove the speaker (2 of 2)
4
5
7
6
ENWW Internal assemblies 129
Power-switch PCA
1. Remove the right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
NOTE: For the HP LaserJet M2727nfs, disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
3. Separate the power-switch PCA (callout 4) from the product.
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD
reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or
mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
Figure 5-51 Remove the power-switch PCA (HP LaserJet M2727nfs shown)
4
1
2
3
130 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. If you need to remove the power-switch PCA mounting bracket, remove two screws (callout 5),
then separate the power-switch PCA mounting bracket from the product.
Figure 5-52 Remove the power-switch PCA mounting bracket
5
ENWW Internal assemblies 131
Formatter
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching
an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do
not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
1. Remove the left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1; GND wire lug, J36, J2, J32, J34) and five FFCs (callout 2;
J4, J27, J28, J31, J26).
Figure 5-53 Remove the formatter (1 of 5)
1
2
1
132 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove six screws (callout 3), and then separate the formatter from the product.
Figure 5-54 Remove the formatter (2 of 5)
3
CAUTION: Make sure that you install the protective sheet behind the formatter when you reinstall
it. Failure to install the protective sheet might cause a short circuit and damage the formatter.
Figure 5-55 Install formatter protective sheet
ENWW Internal assemblies 133
4. For products that use an Asian character control panel only: use a pair of needle nose pliers
to release the Asian-character control-panel-display PCA spacer from the formatter.
Figure 5-56 Remove the formatter (3 of 4)
5. For products that use an Asian character control panel only: remove the Asian-character
control-panel-display PCA from the formatter. Install the PCA on the replacement formatter
(connector H3).
Figure 5-57 Remove the formatter (4 of 4)
134 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Duplex assembly
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
NOTE: After removing the rear cover, the duplex assembly is disconnected at the rear of
the product.
2. Push down on the green lever at the front of the product to unlock and lower the duplex assembly.
Figure 5-58 Remove the duplex assembly (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal assemblies 135
3. Pull the duplex assembly out through the rear of the product.
Figure 5-59 Remove the duplex assembly (2 of 2)
TIP: When you reinstall the duplex assembly, push the size-selection switch in or pull the size-
selection switch out to correctly set the media size that is used in your country/region.
A4
LTR,
LGL
A4
LTR,
LGL
136 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Laser/scanner (print engine)
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching
an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do
not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
2. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1) from the laser/scanner PCA.
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 2) from the top of the laser/scanner.
4. Remove all of the wire harnesses (callout 3) from the retainers.
NOTE: Examine the cable routing as you remove the wire harnesses.
ENWW Internal assemblies 137
5. Remove four screws (callout 4).
Figure 5-60 Remove the laser/scanner assembly
21
3
4
6. Lift the laser/scanner out of the product.
NOTE: Examine the shutter switch placement as you lift the laser/scanner out of the product.
138 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Memory-tag-reader assembly (E-label reader)
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
2. Remove the fan from the product chassis (see step 3 of Fan on page 141).
3. Remove one cable (callout 1) from the cable holder on top of the memory-tag-reader cover.
4. Disconnect one cable from the formatter (callout 2).
Figure 5-61 Remove the memory-tag-reader assembly (1 of 2)
1
2
5. Remove all of the wire harnesses (callout 3) from the retainers.
NOTE: Examine the cable routing as you remove the wire harnesses.
ENWW Internal assemblies 139
6. Remove one screw (callout 4).
TIP: When you reinstall the memory-tag-reader assembly, make sure that the front of the
assembly is under the laser/scanner shutter (callout 5).
Figure 5-62 Remove the memory-tag-reader assembly (2 of 2)
4
5
3
7. Lift up slightly the back of the memory-tag-reader assembly, and then slide the assembly toward
the back of the product to release it from the laser/scanner plate.
TIP: The spring is not attached to the memory-tag-reader assembly (callout 6). Do not lose this
spring.
Figure 5-63 Memory-tag-reader assembly spring
6
140 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fan
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Convenience-stapler power supply. See Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 124.
●Convenience-stapler power supply bracket. See Convenience-stapler power supply bracket
and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 127.
●Power-switch PCA and mounting bracket. See Power-switch PCA on page 130
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J209) at the ECU and feed the wire harness through the hole
in the chassis (behind the power-switch PCA).
Figure 5-64 Remove the fan (1 of 2)
1
ENWW Internal assemblies 141
3. Remove two screws (callout 2), and then lift the fan off of the product.
Figure 5-65 Remove the fan (2 of 2)
2
142 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Duplex-drive gears
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-stapler
power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 124.
●Convenience-stapler bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-
stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 127.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
ENWW Internal assemblies 143
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then lift the assembly away from the product.
NOTE: The gears are not attached to the gear plate. Carefully remove the gear plate and the
gears together to prevent them from falling out of the assembly. If the gears are separated from
the assembly, see Figure 5-67 Replace the duplex-drive gears on page 144 to correctly reinstall
them.
Figure 5-66 Remove the duplex-drive gears
1
TIP: It might be easier to replace the assembly if you place the two large gear sets into the
appropriate holes on the chassis first, and then line up the holes in the gear plate with the gears
as you replace the plate.
Figure 5-67 Replace the duplex-drive gears
144 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Duplex solenoid
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-stapler
power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 124.
●Convenience-stapler bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-
stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 127.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
●Duplex-drive gears. See Duplex-drive gears on page 143.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J211) at the ECU. Feed the wire harness out of the product
and wire-harness guides.
Figure 5-68 Remove the duplex solenoid (1 of 2)
1
ENWW Internal assemblies 145
3. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then lift the solenoid off of the product chassis.
NOTE: The solenoid lever (callout 3) is not retained. Do not lose this lever.
Figure 5-69 Remove the duplex solenoid (2 of 2)
2
3
146 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-stapler
power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 124.
●Convenience-stapler bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-
stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 127.
●Power-switch PCA. See Power-switch PCA on page 130.
●Formatter. See Formatter on page 132.
●Duplex assembly. See Duplex assembly on page 135.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
●Duplex-drive gears. See Duplex-drive gears on page 143.
●Duplex solenoid. See Duplex solenoid on page 145.
2. On the right side of the product, press the tabs on two gears (callout 1) to release the gears, and
then slide the gears off of the shafts.
Figure 5-70 Remove the fuser (1 of 9)
1
ENWW Internal assemblies 147
3. Disconnect the connectors along the edge of the ECU (callout 2). Remove the wire harness from
the guides (callout 3).
Figure 5-71 Remove the fuser (2 of 9)
2
3
4. Remove one screw (callout 4) from the wire harness guide and separate it from the product.
Reinstallation tip You might find it easier to reassemble the wire harnesses and the wire harness
holder if you put the smaller wires in place first.
Figure 5-72 Remove the fuser (3 of 9)
4
148 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5. Disconnect four connectors (callout 5).
Figure 5-73 Remove the fuser (4 of 9)
5
6. Remove one screw (callout 8) on the wire guide that contains the optional tray 3 connector.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tray 3 connector or the wire harness guide. But you need
to release the guide so that the tray 3 connector wire harness is loose enough to be removed from
a guide on the fuser later in this procedure.
Figure 5-74 Remove the fuser (5 of 9)
8
ENWW Internal assemblies 149
7. Remove three screws (callout 9) from the right side of the product.
Figure 5-75 Remove the fuser (6 of 9)
9
8. Remove three screws (callout 10) from the left side of the product.
Figure 5-76 Remove the fuser (7 of 9)
10
150 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
9. Pull on the product chassis at the top to spread the product frame and release the fuser from the
frame.
Figure 5-77 Remove the fuser (8 of 9)
10. Pull the fuser out of the product at an angle so that the delivery-roller shaft clears the hole
(callout 11) in the chassis. Carefully remove the wire harnesses from the guide in the lower-left
corner of the fuser.
Figure 5-78 Remove the fuser (9 of 9)
11
ENWW Internal assemblies 151
Interlock assembly
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), lift the interlock assembly away from the product, and then
disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-79 Remove the interlock assembly
1
2
152 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Engine controller assembly (ECU)
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching
an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do
not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their
connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Power-switch PCA and mounting bracket. See Power-switch PCA on page 130
●Formatter. See Formatter on page 132.
●Duplex assembly. See Duplex assembly on page 135.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
●Duplex-drive gears. See Duplex-drive gears on page 143.
●Fuser. See Fuser on page 147.
●Interlock assembly. See Interlock assembly on page 152.
ENWW Internal assemblies 153
2. Remove the wire harnesses from the retainer under the feed plate (callout 1), and then remove the
feed plate by lifting it and pulling it straight back.
Figure 5-80 Remove the ECU (1 of 7)
1
3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-81 Remove the ECU (2 of 7)
2
154 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Remove one screw (callout 3).
Figure 5-82 Remove the ECU (3 of 7)
3
5. Remove two screws (callout 4) from the left side of the product. Unlace the interlock cables from
the wire harness, and then push the interlock cables and the formatter cable (callout 5) through
the hole in the chassis.
Figure 5-83 Remove the ECU (4 of 7)
4
5
ENWW Internal assemblies 155
6. Spread the product frame on one side of the product to release the internal tabs that secure the
ECU to the chassis.
Figure 5-84 Remove the ECU (5 of 8)
7. Spread the product frame on the other side of the product to release the internal tabs, and then
lower the ECU slightly and pull it straight back to remove it.
NOTE: Make sure that wire harnesses do not become caught on the contact springs as you
remove the ECU.
Figure 5-85 Remove the ECU (6 of 7)
Reinstallation tip When replacing the ECU, you might find it easier to find the correct placement
of the ECU pan in the product if you tip the product so that it rests on its front.
156 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
8. Remove four screws (callout 7), and then lift the ECU off of the ECU pan.
Figure 5-86 Remove the ECU (7 of 7)
7
ENWW Internal assemblies 157
Main motor
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Scanner/ADF assembly. See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Formatter. See Formatter on page 132.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
●Duplex-drive gears. See Duplex-drive gears on page 143.
●Interlock assembly. See Interlock assembly on page 152.
●ECU. See Engine controller assembly (ECU) on page 153.
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-87 Remove the main motor (1 of 2)
1
158 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Hold the motor while releasing the tabs (callout 2) on the wire-harness guide, and then lift the motor
and the guide out of the product together.
Figure 5-88 Remove the main motor (2 of 2)
2
ENWW Internal assemblies 159
Pickup-and-feed assemblies
This section covers the major assemblies of the pickup-and-feed system: the transfer roller and the
registration assembly.
For information about replacing the tray 2 pickup roller, see Replace the tray 2 pickup roller
on page 40.
For information about replacing the tray 2 or tray 3 separation pad, see Replace the tray 2 and optional
tray 3 separation pad on page 45.
For information about replacing the ADF pickup roller, see Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly
on page 110.
Transfer roller
NOTE: Make sure that the transfer roller needs to be replaced before you remove it. Excess handling
can cause additional damage.
1. Remove the print cartridge. See Remove the print cartridge on page 99.
2. Use needle-nose pliers to release the transfer roller tabs at the end of the roller, near the right side
of the product.
CAUTION: Do not break the tabs and do not touch the roller.
Figure 5-89 Remove the transfer roller
3. Lift up the end of the roller near the right side of the product, and then slide it toward the right side
of the product while pulling it out of the product.
160 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Registration-roller assembly
1. Remove five screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-90 Remove the registration-roller assembly
1
2. Lift the entire assembly out of the product.
ENWW Internal assemblies 161
Main gear assembly and tray 2 pickup solenoid
1. Remove the following components.
●Right cover. See Right cover on page 100.
●Left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
●Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 106.
●Top cover. See Top cover on page 108.
●Convenience-stapler power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See Convenience-stapler
power supply (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) on page 124.
●Convenience-stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only). See
Convenience-stapler power supply bracket and strap (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
on page 127.
●Power switch PCA. See Power-switch PCA on page 130.
●Fan. See Fan on page 141.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J206) at the ECU and pull the wires through the chassis.
Figure 5-91 Remove the main gear assembly (1 of 5)
1
162 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Squeeze the retainer tabs on the gear-release lever to disconnect the lever from the print-cartridge
door arm.
Figure 5-92 Remove the main gear assembly (2 of 5)
4. Release the tab on the gear (callout 2) and slide the gear off of the shaft.
5. Remove the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 3).
6. Remove four screws (callout 4).
Figure 5-93 Remove the main gear assembly (3 of 5)
2
3
4
ENWW Internal assemblies 163
7. Pull the main gear assembly straight away from the product.
NOTE: The large gear at the top of the assembly is not captive. Make sure that the gear does
not separate from the assembly when the assembly is removed.
Figure 5-94 Remove the main gear assembly (4 of 5)
8. Remove one screw (callout 5), and then lift the solenoid off of the product.
Figure 5-95 Remove the tray 2 pickup solenoid (5 of 5)
5
164 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6 Solve problems
●Problem-solving checklist
●Control-panel messages
●Clear jams
●Control-panel menus
●Print problems
●Scan problems
●Copy problems
●Fax problems
●Control-panel display problems
●Convenience-stapler problems (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
●DSL problems
●ADF problems
●Functional checks
●Service-mode functions
●Problem-solve tools
●Firmware updates
ENWW 165
Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.
Step
number
Verification step Possible problems Solutions
1Is the power on?
When the product is connected
to a grounded power source
and is turned on, the control
panel shows Hewlett Packard
with moving cursors indicating
that the firmware code is
loading, and the main motor
rotates for approximately 45 to
60 seconds. When the
firmware is done loading,
Scanner bulb warming up
might appear on the control-
panel display, and the scan
head moves back and forth for
10 to 15 seconds. If you lift the
scanner cover, you will see that
the scanner bulb is lit. Near the
end of this time, the automatic
document feeder (ADF) motor
turns on for about two seconds.
No power as a result of a failed power source,
cable, switch, or fuse.
1. Verify that the product is plugged in.
2. Verify that the power cable is functional
and that the power switch is on.
3. Check the power source by plugging
the product directly into the wall or into
a different outlet.
Motor does not start. 1. Verify that the product is plugged into
a working electrical receptacle.
2. Verify that the print cartridge is
installed correctly. Follow the
instructions on the control panel to
remove and replace the cartridge.
3. Verify that the top cover is closed.
ADF motor does not start. Open the ADF cover and remove any
orange shipping tape inside the ADF.
Verify that the ADF connector is connected
correctly to the scanner.
If the ADF motor still does not rotate, replace
the ADF. See ADF assembly on page 115.
Scanner bulb does not light. If the scanner bulb does not light, verify that
the wire-harness connectors from the
scanner to the formatter are connected
correctly.
If the error persists, replace the following
components one at a time until the problem
is resolved: scanner assembly, formatter.
See Scanner/ADF assembly on page 117
and Formatter on page 132.
2Does Ready appear in the
product control panel?
The control panel should
function without error
messages.
Control panel shows an error.
Asian control panel characters do not display
correctly.
See Control-panel messages on page 169
for a list of common messages that will help
you correct the error.
If the product uses the Asian control panel
and the formatter was recently replaced,
make sure that the Asian character display
PCA is installed correctly and fully seated in
the formatter connector (H3).
166 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Step
number
Verification step Possible problems Solutions
3Do information pages print?
Print a Configuration page.
Error message appears on the control-panel
display.
See Control-panel messages on page 169
for a list of common messages that will help
you correct the error.
Media does not move smoothly through the
product paper path.
Make sure the media meets
HP specifications. See Media specifications
on page 16.
Clean the paper path. See Clean the paper
path on page 56.
Poor print quality. See Print-quality problems on page 204.
4Does the product copy?
Place the Configuration page
into the ADF and make a copy.
The report should feed
smoothly through the ADF, and
copies should print without
print-quality problems. Make a
copy from the flatbed as well.
Poor copy quality from the ADF. 1. If the print quality from the internal tests
and the copy from the flatbed are
acceptable, clean the ADF scanning
glass. See Clean the product
on page 49.
2. If the ADF is damaged, replace the
ADF. See ADF assembly
on page 115.
Media does not move smoothly through the
ADF path.
1. Make sure that the media in the ADF
meets ADF specifications.
2. Clean the ADF pick roller. See Clean
the product on page 49.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
ADF pick roller. See Replace the ADF
pickup-roller assembly on page 110.
4. If the problem persists, replace the
ADF. See ADF assembly
on page 115.
Poor copy quality from the flatbed. If the print quality from the internal tests and
the copy from the ADF are acceptable, clean
the flatbed glass. See Clean the product
on page 49.
5Does the product send a fax?
Connect the telephone line and
press Start Fax to verify that a
dial tone exists (using a hand
set, if necessary). Attempt to
send a fax.
Telephone line is not operational or the
product is not plugged into the telephone line
Verify that the product is plugged into a
telephone line that you know works.
Telephone cord is faulty or is plugged into the
wrong connector.
1. Try plugging the telephone cord into
the other connector.
2. Try a new telephone cord.
Fax number is incorrect or incomplete. Check the fax number and retype the correct
and complete fax number.
Product fax settings are set incorrectly. Review and reset the product fax settings.
6 Does the product receive a
fax?
Use another fax machine to
send a fax to the product.
Too many telephone devices are plugged in,
or telephone devices are not connected in the
correct order.
Make sure that the product is the only device
on the telephone line and try again to
receive the fax.
Product fax settings are set incorrectly. Review and reset the product fax settings.
NOTE: If the product is connected to a
computer, use the HP Fax Setup Wizard to
review and reset fax settings.
ENWW Problem-solving checklist 167
Step
number
Verification step Possible problems Solutions
7Does the product print from
the computer?
Connect the network cable or
USB cable to the product and
the computer. Use a word-
processing program to send a
print job to the product.
Software is not installed correctly or an error
occurred during software installation.
Uninstall and then reinstall the product
software. Verify that you are using the
correct installation procedure and the
correct port setting.
The cable is not connected correctly. Reconnect the cable.
Incorrect driver is selected. Select the correct driver.
Other devices are connected to the USB port. Disconnect the other devices and try to print
again.
There might be a problem with the network
connection.
If printing through the network, verify that the
device has a valid TCP/IP address by
checking the network configuration. If the
issue persists, verify that the green LED on
the network connector on the back of the
device is lit. If it is not lit, there might be a
bad network connection, cable, or network
device (router or hub).
If the issue persists after verifying the above,
uninstall and then reinstall the network
driver software from the device installation
CD. Print a Configuration page for reference
to the TCP/IP address during reinstallation.
If the problem still persists, replace the
formatter.
Port driver problem in Microsoft Windows. Uninstall and then reinstall the product
software. Verify that you are using the
correct installation procedure and the
correct port setting.
8 Does the product scan to the
computer?
Turn the product off, and then
on. Initiate a scan from the
basic desktop software at your
computer.
Cable is not connected correctly. Reconnect the cable.
Software is not installed correctly or an error
occurred during software installation.
Uninstall and then reinstall the product
software. Verify that you are using the
correct installation procedure and the
correct port setting.
168 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control-panel messages
The majority of the control-panel messages are intended to guide the user through typical operation.
The control-panel messages indicate the status of the current operation, and include a page count on
the second line of the display, if appropriate. When the product is receiving fax data, print data, or
scanning commands, control-panel messages indicate this status. In addition, alert messages, warning
messages, and critical error messages indicate situations that might require some action.
Alert and warning messages
Alert and warning messages appear temporarily and might require the user to acknowledge the
message by pressing OK to resume or by pressing Cancel to cancel the job. With certain warnings, the
job might not complete or the print quality might be affected. If the alert or warning message is related
to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume the printing job after
the warning has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.
Alert and warning message tables
Table 6-1 Alert and warning messages
Control panel message Description Recommended action
10.0000 Supply Memory Error A specific print cartridge has an e-label error. Reinstall the print cartridge.
Turn off and then turn on the product.
If the problem is not solved, replace the
cartridge.
10.1000 Supply Memory Error A specific print cartridge has a missing e-
label.
Reinstall the print cartridge.
Turn off and then turn on the product.
If the problem is not solved, replace the
cartridge.
ADF door is open The ADF lid is open or a sensor is
malfunctioning.
Make sure that the ADF lid is closed.
Remove the ADF and reinstall it.
If the message persists, turn off the power by
using the power switch, wait at least 30
seconds, and then turn on the power and wait
for the product to initialize.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Canceled copy. Clear document The Cancel button was pressed to cancel the
current job while pages were feeding from the
ADF. The cancel process does not
automatically clear the ADF.
Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams
from the ADF on page 180. Then, clear the
items in the ADF tray and start over.
Canceled scan. Clear document The Cancel button was pressed to cancel the
current job while pages were feeding from the
ADF. The cancel process does not
automatically clear the ADF.
Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams
from the ADF on page 180. Then, clear the
items in the ADF tray and start over.
Canceled send. Clear document The Cancel button was pressed to cancel the
current job while pages were feeding from the
ADF tray. The cancel process does not
automatically clear the ADF.
Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams
from the ADF on page 180. Then, clear the
items in the ADF tray and start over.
ENWW Control-panel messages 169
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Comm. error [Receiver CSID] A fax communication error occurred between
the product and the receiver.
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Unplug the product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a
call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Comm. error [Sender CSID] A fax communication error occurred between
the product and the sender.
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Unplug the product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a
call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Device error, press OK Generic engine error. This is a warning message only. Job output
might be affected.
Device is busy. Try again later The product is currently in use. Wait for the product to finish the current job.
Doc feeder jam Clear, Reload A piece of media is jammed in the ADF tray. Open the document release door, clear the
jam, close the document release door, and
reload the paper into the ADF tray.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Doc feeder jam, DATE/TIME ADF has not been cleared since previous
jam.
Clear the jam.
Document feeder mispick. Reload Media in the ADF tray was not picked up. Remove the media from the ADF tray, and
then reload it.
Clean the ADF pickup roller. See Clean the
ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 55.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Door open The print-cartridge door is open. Close the print-cartridge door.
Engine comm. error The product experienced a print engine
communication error.
This is a warning message only. Job output
might be affected.
Engine error, press OK The product experienced a print engine error. This is a warning message only. Job output
might be affected.
Fit to Page on flatbed only The copy reduce/enlarge feature (called "Fit
to Page") applies only to copies made from
the flatbed scanner.
Use the flatbed or select another reduction/
enlargement setting.
Install black cartridge No cartridge installed with door closed. Install print cartridge.
Table 6-1 Alert and warning messages (continued)
170 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Invalid driver Press OK You are using the incorrect printer driver. Select the printer driver that is appropriate for
your product.
Invalid entry Invalid data or response. Correct the entry.
Jam in (area), Open door and clear jam Paper jam in one of the following areas: drum
area, fuser area, duplex feeding area, duplex
receiving area, and duplex pickup area.
Clear the jam from the area indicated on the
product control panel, and then follow the
control panel instructions. See Clear jams
on page 179.
Jam in Tray #, Clear jam and then press
OK
The product has detected a jam in an input
tray.
Clear the jam from the area indicated on the
product control panel, and then follow the
control panel instructions. See Clear jams
on page 179.
Load paper Out of paper in all available trays. Load paper in trays.
Load Tray # <TYPE> <SIZE>, Press OK to
use available media
Device is processing job, but a matching tray
is empty.
Press OK to use existing available media.
Load tray #, Press OK Manual duplex mode. “#” is the tray number
where the first half of the job printed.
Load paper in the correct tray.
Load Tray 1 <TYPE> <SIZE>, Press OK to
use available media
Device is processing job, but no trays match. Press OK to use existing tray settings.
Load Tray 1, <PLAIN> <SIZE> / Cleaning
mode, OK to start
Cleaning mode paper prompt. Press OK to begin the cleaning procedures.
Manual feed <SIZE> <TYPE>, Press OK to
use available media
Print Manual Feed mode. Load paper into the priority input tray.
Mem. low 1 copy. Press OK The product completed making one copy.
The remaining copies have been canceled
because of low memory.
Press Cancel to clear the error. Break the job
into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.
Memory is low Try again later The product does not have enough memory
to start a new job.
Wait until the current job is finished before
starting a new job.
Memory is low. Press OK The product memory has been almost
completely filled.
Allow the product to finish the job, or press
Setup to cancel the job.
Memory low Only 1 copy made The product does not have enough memory
to complete the collated copy job.
Break the job into smaller jobs that contain
fewer pages.
Misprint, Press OK Feed delay misprint. Reload paper.
No paper pickup, Press OK The product has failed to pick up a piece of
media.
Verify that the media was inserted far enough
into the input tray. In tray 1, verify that the
paper-length guide is in the correct position
for the media size that you are using.
Reload the media in the input tray and press
Setup to continue the job.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Non-HP supply Installed A new supply has been installed that is not
made by HP. This message appears for
several seconds, and then the product
returns to the Ready state.
If you believe you purchased an HP supply,
please call the HP fraud hotline at
1-877-219-3183. Service or repairs that are
required as a result of using non-HP supplies
is not covered under HP warranty.
Table 6-1 Alert and warning messages (continued)
ENWW Control-panel messages 171
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Order black Cartridge Print cartridge is low. Order a new print cartridge.
Page too complex, press OK The product could not print the current page
because of its complexity.
Press Setup to clear the message.
Allow the product to finish the job, or press
Cancel to cancel the job.
Scanner reserved for PC scan A computer is using the product to create a
scan.
Wait until the computer scan has finished, or
cancel the scan from the computer software,
or press Cancel.
Scanning error Cannot connect The product cannot transmit scan information
to a computer.
Verify that the connection cable is not loose
or damaged. Replace the cable if necessary,
and try the scan again.
Settings cleared, DATE/TIME The product has cleared job settings. Re-enter any appropriate job settings.
Used black cartridge in use
alternates with
to accept, press OK
A used printer cartridge has been installed or
moved.
Press OK to return to the Ready state.
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Comm. error A fax communication error occurred between
the product and the sender or receiver.
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Unplug the product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a
call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Fax delayed – Send memory full Fax memory is full. Cancel the fax by pressing OK or Cancel.
Resend the fax. You might need to send the
fax in multiple sections if the error occurs
again.
Fax is busy Canceled send The fax line to which you were sending a fax
was busy. The product has canceled sending
the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Check that the Redial if busy option is
enabled.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by
pressing Start Fax.
Make sure that the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making a
voice call.
Table 6-1 Alert and warning messages (continued)
172 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line, and then try sending the
fax again.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Fax is busy Redial pending The fax line to which you were sending a fax
was busy. The product automatically redials
the busy number.
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by
pressing Start Fax.
Make sure that the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making a
voice call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line, and try sending the fax
again.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Fax memory full Canceling recv. During the fax transmission, the product ran
out of memory. Only the pages that fit into
memory will be printed.
Print all of the faxes, and then have the
sender resend the fax. Have the sender
divide the fax job into multiple jobs before
resending. Cancel all fax jobs or clear the
faxes from memory.
Note: Adding a memory DIMM does not help
resolve this issue.
Fax memory full Canceling send During the fax job, the memory filled. All
pages of the fax have to be in memory for a
fax job to work correctly. Only the pages that
fit into memory were sent.
Print all received faxes or wait until all
pending faxes are sent.
Ask the sender to send the fax again.
Cancel all fax jobs or clear the faxes from
memory.
Fax recv. error An error occurred while trying to receive a fax. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Try faxing back to the sender or another fax
machine.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by
pressing Start Fax.
Check that the telephone cord is securely
connected by unplugging and replugging the
cord.
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages (continued)
ENWW Control-panel messages 173
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Make sure that you are using the telephone
cord that came with the product.
Make sure that the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making a
voice call.
Decrease the fax speed. Ask the sender to
resend the fax.
Turn off error-correction mode. Ask the
sender to resend the fax.
Connect the product to a different phone line.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Fax Send error An error occurred while trying to send a fax. Try resending the fax.
Try faxing to another fax number.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by
pressing Start Fax.
Check that the telephone cord is securely
connected by unplugging and replugging the
cord.
Make sure that you are using the telephone
cord that came with the product.
Make sure that the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making a
voice call.
Connect the product to a different phone line.
Set the fax resolution to Standard instead of
the default of Fine.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Group dial not allowed in group The speed-dial code that you typed is
programmed for a group. Adding a group-dial
to another group-dial is not allowed.
Add one-touch buttons (programmed as an
individual speed dial) or speed-dial codes to
a group-dial.
Invalid entry Invalid data or response. Correct the entry.
No Dial Tone The product could not detect a dial tone. Check for a dial tone on the phone line by
pressing Start Fax.
Unplug the telephone cord from both the
product and the wall and replug the cord.
Make sure that you are using the telephone
cord that came with the product.
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages (continued)
174 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Unplug the product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a
voice call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
No document sent The product did not scan any pages, or it did
not receive any pages from the computer to
transmit a fax.
Try sending the fax again.
No fax answer Redial pending The receiving fax line did not answer. The
product attempts to redial after a few minutes.
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
If the product continues to redial, unplug the
product telephone cord from the wall, plug in
a telephone, and try making a voice call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
No fax answer. Canceled send Attempts to redial a fax number failed, or the
“Redial-no answer” option was turned off.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Check that the redial option is enabled.
Unplug the telephone cord from both the
product and the wall and replug the cord.
Unplug the product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a
voice call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
No fax detected The product answered the incoming call but
did not detect that a fax machine was calling.
Allow the product to retry receiving the fax.
Try a different phone cord.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for
another phone line.
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages (continued)
ENWW Control-panel messages 175
Control panel message Description Recommended action
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Table 6-2 Alert and warning messages (continued)
176 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Critical error messages
Critical error messages can indicate some kind of failure. Turning off and then turning on the power
might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product might require service.
Critical error message-tables
Table 6-3 Critical error messages
Control panel message Description Recommended action
49 Error, Turn off then on The product has experienced an internal
embedded software error.
Turn off the power by using the power switch,
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the
power and wait for the product to initialize.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
50.x Fuser Error The product has experienced an internal
hardware error.
1. Turn off the power by using the power
switch, and then wait at least 30
seconds.
2. If a surge protector is being used,
remove it. Plug the product directly into
the wall socket.
3. Turn on the power and wait for the
product to initialize.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
52 Scanner Error The product has experienced an internal
hardware error.
Turn off the power by using the power switch,
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the
power and wait for the product to initialize.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.
Use the power switch to turn the product on.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
55.4 Error, Turn off then on The product has experienced an engine
communication timeout error.
Turn off the power by using the power switch,
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the
power and wait for the product to initialize.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.
Use the power switch to turn the product on.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
79 Error Turn off then on The product has experienced an internal
firmware error.
Turn off the power by using the power switch,
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the
power and wait for the product to initialize.
If you have recently installed a memory DIMM
in the product, turn off the product, remove
the memory DIMM, reinstall the DIMM to
ENWW Control-panel messages 177
Control panel message Description Recommended action
verify that it is seated properly, and then turn
on the product.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.
Use the power switch to turn the product on.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Scanner error #, Turn off then on The product has experienced an error in the
scanner sub-assembly area.
Turn off the power by using the power switch,
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the
power and wait for the product to initialize.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.
Use the power switch to turn the product on.
If the error persists, contact HP. See
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 or the
support flyer that came in the product box.
Table 6-3 Critical error messages (continued)
178 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams
Causes of jams
Occasionally, paper or other print media can become jammed during a print job. Some causes include:
●The input trays are loaded improperly or overfilled, or the media guides are not set properly.
●Media is added to or removed from an input tray during a print job or an input tray is removed from
the product during a print job.
●The cartridge door is opened during a print job.
●Too many sheets have accumulated in an output area, or sheets are blocking an output area.
●The print media that is being used does not meet HP specifications. See Media specifications
on page 16.
●The media is damaged or has foreign objects attached to it, such as staples or paper clips.
●The media has already passed through the product print path and is being reused.
●The environment in which the print media was stored is too humid or too dry. See Media
specifications on page 16.
ENWW Clear jams 179
Where to look for jams
Jams can occur in these locations:
●In the automatic document feeder (ADF)
●In input areas
●In the automatic duplexer
●In output areas
●Inside the product
Find and remove the jam by using the instructions on the following pages. If the location of the jam is
not obvious, first look inside the product.
Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam. This problem typically resolves itself after a few
sheets have been printed.
Clear jams from the ADF
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a fax, copy, or scan job.
You are notified of a media jam by the Doc feeder jam Clear, Reload message that appears on the
product control-panel display.
●The ADF input tray is loaded incorrectly or is too full. See Load paper and print media
on page 26 for more information.
●The media does not meet HP specifications, such as those for size or type. See Media
specifications on page 16 for more information.
1. Open the ADF cover.
NOTE: Verify that any shipping tape inside the ADF has been removed.
2. Remove the jam cleanout part. Using both hands, lift up on the two handles until the part unsnaps.
Rotate and lift out the cleanout part and set it aside.
180 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
3. Lifting the green lever, and then rotate the pick mechanism until it stays open.
4. Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. If you feel resistance, go to the next step.
5. Open the ADF lid and gently loosen the media using both hands.
6. When the media is free, gently pull it out in the direction shown.
7. Close the lid to the flatbed scanner.
ENWW Clear jams 181
8. Lower the green lever.
9. Reinstall the cleanout part by inserting it as shown. Push down on the two tabs until the part snaps
into place. Install the cleanout part correctly, because future jamming might occur if the cleanout
part is not replaced correctly.
10. Close the ADF lid.
Clear jams from the input-tray areas
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damages caused by sharp objects are not covered by the warranty.
When removing jammed media, pull the jammed media straight away from the product. Pulling jammed
media out of the product at an angle can damage the product.
NOTE: Depending on where the jam is located, some of the following steps might not be necessary.
1. Open the rear output door.
182 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
2. Rotate the green pressure-release levers downward.
3. Open tray 2 and optional tray 3.
4. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and
carefully pull it free from the product.
5. If no media is visible, open the print-cartridge door, remove the print cartridge, and then rotate the
upper media guide. Carefully pull the media up and out of the product. Replace the print cartridge.
6. Close tray 2 and optional tray 3.
7. Close the rear output door.
ENWW Clear jams 183
Clear jams from the duplexer
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damages caused by sharp objects are not covered by the warranty.
When removing jammed media, pull the jammed media straight away from the product. Pulling jammed
media out of the product at an angle can damage the product.
NOTE: Depending on where the jam is located, some of the following steps might not be necessary.
1. Open the rear output door.
2. Rotate the green pressure-release levers downward.
3. Remove tray 2.
4. Push down on the green lever on the automatic two-sided path door on the front of the product.
184 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
5. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and
carefully pull it free from the product.
NOTE: If you cannot grasp the media with your hands, perform the procedure in Clear jams from
the print-cartridge area on page 188.
6. Close the automatic two-sided path door.
7. Reinsert tray 2.
8. Close the rear output bin, and then open the automatic two-sided path door on the back of the
product.
ENWW Clear jams 185
9. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and
carefully pull it free from the product.
10. Close the automatic two-sided path door.
Clear jams from the output-bin areas
Top (face-down) output bin
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damages caused by sharp objects are not covered by the warranty.
With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and carefully
pull it free from the product.
186 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Rear (face-up) output bin
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damages caused by sharp objects are not covered by the warranty.
1. Open the straight-through output door.
2. Rotate the green pressure-release levers downward.
3. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and
carefully pull it free from the printer.
NOTE: If you cannot grasp the media with your hands, perform the procedure in Clear jams from
the print-cartridge area on page 188.
4. Close the straight-through output door.
ENWW Clear jams 187
Clear jams from the print-cartridge area
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damages caused by sharp objects are not covered by the warranty.
When removing jammed media, pull the jammed media straight away from the product. Pulling jammed
media out of the product at an angle can damage the product.
1. Open the print-cartridge door, and then remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, minimize its exposure to direct light.
2. Open the rear output door, and then rotate the green pressure-release levers downward.
3. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and
carefully pull it free from the product.
4. Replace the print cartridge and close the print-cartridge door.
5. Close the rear output door.
188 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams from the convenience stapler (HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP
only)
To reduce the risk of staple jams, make sure that you staple 20 or fewer pages of media (80 g/m
2
or 20
lb) at a time.
1. Turn off the HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP, and then open the stapler door.
NOTE: Opening the stapler door disables the stapler.
2. Remove the staple cassette from the product.
3. Clear any loose staples from the stapler and from the staple cassette.
4. Replace the staple cassette.
ENWW Clear jams 189
5. Close the stapler door, and then turn on the product.
6. Insert media to test the convenience stapler. Repeat steps 1 through 6 if necessary.
Avoid repeated jams
●Verify that the input tray is not overfilled. The input tray capacity varies depending on the type of
print media that you are using.
●Verify that the media guides are properly adjusted.
●Check that the input tray is securely in place.
●Do not add print media to the input tray while the product is printing.
●Use only HP-recommended media types and sizes. See Media specifications on page 16 for more
information about print media types.
●Do not fan the media prior to loading it in a tray. To loosen the ream, hold it firmly in both hands
and twist the media by rotating your hands in the opposite direction.
●Do not let print media stack up in the output bin. The print media type and the amount of toner used
affect the output bin capacity.
●Check the power connection. Make sure that the power cord is firmly connected to both the product
and the power supply box. Plug the power cord into a grounded power outlet.
●Do not use media has already passed through the product print path.
●Do not use media that is damaged or has foreign objects attached to it, such as staples or paper
clips.
190 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control-panel menus
Use the control-panel main menus
To gain access to the control-panel main menus, use the following steps.
NOTE: For information about the control-panel secondary menus, see Control-panel secondary
menus on page 199.
1. Press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to navigate the listings.
●Press OK to select the appropriate option.
●Press Cancel to cancel an action or return to the Ready state.
Control-panel main menus
These menus are available from the control-panel main menu:
●Use the Fax Job status menu to display a list of all faxes that are waiting to be sent, or have been
received but are waiting to be printed, forwarded, or uploaded to the computer.
●Use the Fax functions menu to configure fax functions such as scheduling a delayed fax,
cancelling the Receive to PC mode, reprinting faxes that were previously printed, or printing faxes
that are stored in memory.
●Use the Copy setup menu to configure basic copy default settings such as contrast, collation, or
the number of copies printed.
●Use the Reports menu to print reports that provide information about the product.
●Use the Fax setup menu to configure the fax phone book, the outgoing and incoming fax options,
and the basic settings for all faxes.
●Use the System setup menu to establish basic product settings such as language, print quality,
or volume levels.
●Use the Network config menu to configure network settings such as TCP/IP configuration.
●Use the Service menu to restore default settings, clean the product, and activate special modes
that affect print output.
NOTE: To print a detailed list of the entire control-panel menu and its structure, print a menu map.
See Product information pages and reports on page 237.
Table 6-4 Fax Job status menu
Menu item Description
Fax Job status Displays pending fax jobs, and allows you to cancel pending fax jobs.
Table 6-5 Fax functions menu
Menu item Description
Send fax later Allows a fax to be sent at a later time and date.
ENWW Control-panel menus 191
Menu item Description
Stop Recv to PC Disables the Receive to PC setting that allows a computer to upload all current faxes that have
not been printed and all future faxes received by the product.
Reprint last Reprints the faxes that are stored in the product memory.
Polling receive Allows the product to call another fax machine that has polling send enabled.
Clear saved faxs Clears all faxes in the product memory.
Table 6-6 Copy setup menu
Menu item Sub-menu item Description
Default Quality Mixed
Picture
Film photo
Text
Sets the default copy quality.
Def. light/dark Sets the default contrast option.
Def. Collation On
Off
Sets the default collation option.
Def. # of copies (Range: 1-99) Sets the default number of copies.
Def. Reduce/Enlrg Original=100%
Lgl->Ltr=78%
Lgl->A4=83%
A4–>Ltr=94%
Ltr->A4=97%
Full Page=91%
Fit to page
2 pages/sheet
4 pages/sheet
Custom:25-400%
Sets the default percentage to reduce or enlarge a copied
document.
Def. Tray Select Auto select
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (if the tray is installed)
Sets the default input paper tray.
Default 2-sided 1 to 1 sided
1 to 2 sided
2 to 2 sided
2 to 1 sided
Sets the default input scan format and the default output
format. Two-sided printing is supported from the ADF only.
Table 6-5 Fax functions menu (continued)
192 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Menu item Sub-menu item Description
Def. Copy Draft On
Off
Sets the default draft mode option.
Def. Multi-page On
Off
Sets the default multi-page flatbed copy option.
Restore defaults Sets all customized copy settings to the factory default
values.
Table 6-7 Reports menu
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Demo page Prints a page that demonstrates print quality.
Fax Reports Fax Confirmation Never
Every fax
Send fax only
Receive fax
Sets whether or not the product prints a confirmation report
after a successful sending or receiving job.
Include 1st page On
Off
Sets whether or not the product includes a thumbnail image
of the first page of the fax on the report.
Fax Error Report Every error
Send Error
Receive Error
Never
Sets whether or not the product prints a report after a failed
sending or receiving job.
Last Call Report Prints a detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent
or received.
Fax Activity log Print log now
Auto Log Print
Print log now: Prints a list of the faxes that have been sent
from or received by this product.
Auto Log Print: Select On to automatically print a report
after every fax job. Select Off to turn off the automatic print
feature.
PhoneBook report Prints a list of the speed dials that have been set up for this
product.
Block Fax list Prints a list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending
faxes to this product.
Billing report Prints a list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing
faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed
to each code. This menu item appears only when the billing
codes feature is turned on.
All fax reports Prints all fax-related reports.
Menu structure Prints a control-panel menu layout map. The active settings
for each menu are listed.
Table 6-6 Copy setup menu (continued)
ENWW Control-panel menus 193
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Config report Prints a list of all the product settings. Includes network
information when the product is connected to the network.
Supplies status Prints the print-cartridge status. Includes the following
information:
●Estimated pages remaining
●Serial number
●Number of pages printed
Network report Displays status for:
●Network hardware configuration
●Enabled features
●TCP/IP and SNMP information
●Network statistics
Usage page Displays the number of pages printed, faxed, copied, and
scanned by the product.
PCL font list Prints a list of all installed PCL 5 fonts.
PS font list Prints a list of all installed PS fonts.
PCL6 font list Prints a list of all installed PCL 6 fonts.
Service page Displays supported paper types, copy settings, and
miscellaneous product settings.
Table 6-8 Fax setup menu
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Fax Header Your fax number
Company name
Sets the identifying information that is sent to the receiving
product.
Phone Book Individual setup Add/Edit
Delete
Edits the fax phone book speed dials and group-dial entries.
The product supports up to 120 phone book entries, which
can be either individual or group entries.
Group setup Add/Edit group
Delete group
Del. # in group
Delete all
Table 6-7 Reports menu (continued)
194 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Fax Send setup Def. Resolution Fine
Superfine
Photo
Standard
Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution
images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more
detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and
show less detail, but the file size is smaller.
Def. light/dark Sets the darkness of outgoing faxes.
Def. glass size Letter
A4
Sets the default paper size for documents being scanned
from the flatbed scanner.
Dialing Mode Tone
Pulse
Sets whether the product should use tone or pulse dialing.
Redial if busy On
Off
Sets whether or not the product should attempt to redial if
the line is busy.
Redial-no answer On
Off
Sets whether the product should attempt to dial if the
recipient fax number does not answer.
Redial Comm Err. On
Off
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial the
recipient fax number if a communication error occurs.
Dial Prefix On
Off
Specifies a prefix number that must be dialed when sending
faxes from the product.
Detect dial tone On
Off
Sets whether the product should check for a dial tone before
sending a fax.
Billing codes On
Off
Enables the use of billing codes when set to On. A prompt
will appear that asks you to enter the billing code for an
outgoing fax.
Table 6-8 Fax setup menu (continued)
ENWW Control-panel menus 195
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Fax Recv. setup Answer mode Automatic
TAM
Fax/Tel
Manual
Sets the type of answer mode. The following options are
available:
●Automatic: The product automatically answers an
incoming call on the configured number of rings.
●TAM: A telephone answering machine (TAM) is
attached to the Aux phone port of the product. The
product will not pick up any incoming call, but only listen
for fax tones after the answering machine has picked
up the call.
●Fax/Tel: The product must automatically pick up the
call and determine if the call is a voice or fax call. If the
call is a fax call, the product handles the call as usual.
If the call is a voice call, an audible synthesized ring is
generated to alert the user of an incoming voice call.
●Manual : The user must press the Start Fax button or
use an extension phone to make the product answer
the incoming call.
Rings to answer (Range of 1-9) Sets the number of rings that must occur before the fax
modem answers.
Answer Ring Type All Rings
Single
Double
Triple
Double&Triple
Allows a user to have two or three phone numbers on a
single line, each with a different ring pattern (on a phone
system with distinctive-ring service).
●All Rings: The product answers any calls that come
through the telephone line.
●Single: The product answers any calls that produce a
single-ring pattern.
●Double: The product answers any calls that produce a
double-ring pattern.
●Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a
triple-ring pattern.
●Double&Triple: The product answers any calls that
produce a double-ring or triple-ring pattern.
Extension Phone On
Off
When this feature is enabled, press the 1-2-3 buttons on the
extension phone to cause the product to answer an
incoming fax call.
Silence Detect On
Off
Sets whether the product can receive faxes from older
model fax machines that do not emit the initial fax tones used
during fax transmission.
Fit to page On
Off
Shrinks faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so
that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If this
feature is set to Off, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will print
on multiple pages.
Stamp faxes On
Off
Sets product to add the date, time, sender's phone number,
and page number to each page of the faxes that this product
receives.
Forward fax On
Off
Sets product to send all received faxes to another fax
machine.
Table 6-8 Fax setup menu (continued)
196 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Block faxes Add entry
Delete entry
Clear all
Modifies the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list can contain
up to 30 numbers. When the product receives a call from
one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax.
It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-
accounting information.
Private receive On
Off
Setting Private receive to On requires the user to have set
a password in product security. After the password is set,
the following options are set:
●Private receive is turned on.
●All old faxes are deleted from memory.
●Fax forwarding or Receive to PC are set to Off.
●All incoming faxes are stored in memory.
Print faxes Prints stored faxes when the private-receive feature is on.
This menu item appears only when the private-receive
feature is turned on.
Reprint faxes On
Off
Sets whether all received faxes stored in available memory
can be reprinted.
F/T ring time 20
30
40
70
Sets when the product should stop sounding the Fax/Tel
audible ring to notify the user of an incoming voice call.
Print duplex On
Off
Sets whether all received faxes are printed using both sides
of the paper.
All faxes Error correction On
Off
Sets whether the product sends or receives the error portion
again when a fax transmission error occurs.
Fax Speed Fast(V.34)
Medium(V.17)
Slow(V.29)
Increases or decreases the allowed fax communication
speed.
Table 6-9 System setup menu
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Language (List of available
control-panel
display languages.)
Sets the language in which the control panel displays
messages and product reports.
Table 6-8 Fax setup menu (continued)
ENWW Control-panel menus 197
Menu Item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Description
Paper setup Def. paper size Letter
A4
Legal
Sets the size for printing internal reports or any print job that
does not specify a size.
Def. paper type Lists available
media types.
Sets the type for printing internal reports or any print job that
does not specify a type.
Tray 1 Paper type
Paper size
Sets the default size and type for tray 1.
Tray 2 Sets the default size and type for tray 2.
Tray 3 Sets the default size and type for optional tray 3. This menu
item appears only if tray 3 is installed.
Paper out action Wait forever
Cancel
Override
Determines how the product reacts when a print job requires
a media size or type that is unavailable or when a specified
tray is empty.
●Select Wait forever to make the product wait until the
correct media is loaded.
●Select Override to print on a different size paper after
a specified delay.
●Select Cancel to automatically cancel the print job after
a specified delay.
●If either Override or Cancel is chosen, the control
panel prompts for the number of seconds to delay. Use
the arrow keys to either decrease the time or increase
the time up to 3600 seconds.
Print quality Cartridge low (Range of 1-20) Sets the percentage at which the control panel generates a
low-toner message.
Replace supplies Stop at Out
Override out
Sets how the product reacts when it detects that the print
cartridge is out.
Print Density (Range of 1-5) Sets how much toner the product should apply to thicken
lines and edges.
Volume settings Alarm volume Soft
Medium
Loud
Off
Sets the volume levels for the product.
Ring volume
Key-press volume
Phoneline volume
Time/Date (Settings for time
format, current time,
date format, and
current date.)
Sets the time and date setting for the product.
Product security On
Off
Sets the product-security feature. When the setting is set to
On, you must set a personal identification number (PIN).
Courier font Regular
Dark
Sets Courier font values.
Table 6-9 System setup menu (continued)
198 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Table 6-10 Service menu
Menu item Sub-menu item Description
Print T.30 trace Never
If error
At end of call
Now
Prints or schedules a report that is used to problem solve fax
transmission issues.
Cleaning mode Cleans the product when specks or other marks appear on printed
output. The cleaning process removes dust and excess toner from
the paper path.
When selected, the product prompts you to load plain Letter or A4
paper in tray 1. Press OK to begin the cleaning process. Wait until
the process completes. Discard the page that prints.
USB speed High
Full
Sets the USB speed.
Less paper curl
Control-panel secondary menus
Use the Secondary service and Developer's menus to perform various tests and print service reports.
Use the control-panel secondary menus
To gain access to the control-panel secondary menus, use the following steps.
1. Press Setup.
2. Press the Left arrow (<) and Cancel buttons at the same time.
NOTE: Some control panels might require that the Left arrow (<) be pressed slightly before the
Cancel button.
3. Press Setup.
4. Use the arrow buttons to navigate the listings.
5. Press OK to select the appropriate option, or Press Cancel to cancel an action or return to the
Ready state.
Control-panel secondary menus
These menus are available from the control-panel secondary menu:
●Use the Secondary service menu to print service reports, calibrate the scanner, reset the telecom
country/region location, test the control-panel display, and view the firmware version.
●Use the Developer's menu to test telecom settings, enter scanner settings, adjust fax data-store
parameters, and print developer's reports.
ENWW Control-panel menus 199
To adjust fax data-store parameters
When you adjust fax data-store parameters, the product does not alert you to incorrect input values.
Changing fax data-store parameters and render the product illegal or inoperable.
1. On the developer's menu, use the arrow buttons to navigate to R/W Parameter, and then press
OK.
2. Use the arrow buttons to locate the parameter that you want to change. The current setting appears
on the control-panel display.
3. Type the new value for the fax data-store parameter, and then press OK.
To print a list of all the Fax data-store parameters
1. From the developer's menu select Dev. Reports.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select DS Fax, and then press OK.
To change the telecom country/region setting
Three situation can occur that necessitate changing the country/region settings for the product.
●The customer has moved to a different country/region from where the product was purchased.
●The information has been erased because of a NVRAM initialization, or parameters are set to “undefined.”
●The formatter was replaced.
1. On the developer's menu, use the arrow buttons to navigate to R/W Parameter, and then press
OK.
2. Press 3.
3. When the message LIU COUNTRY appears on the control-panel display, press OK.
4. Type the new telecom country/region number, and then press OK
5. After the product returns to the Ready state, turn the power off, and then on.
Table 6-11 Secondary service menu
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Service Reports Cont. Self-Test Cont. Self-Test [Cancel] to stop
Extended Keymap
Error Report
200 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Scan Calibration Calibrate Calibrate 300 mono copy
Calibrate 600 scan to host
Calibrate 1200 scan to host
Corrected Corrected 300 mono copy
Corrected 600 scan to host
Corrected 1200 scan to host
Tables Tables Debug On
Tables Debug Off
Tables Mono Tonemaps
Location USA No
Yes
Display test LED test, show: <LED name>
...................
Line 1 test
Line 2 test
...................
Display ###-###
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
Button test Key test: press <key name>
Show FW Version
Ethernet reset
Table 6-12 Developer's menu
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Read Register Enter Register ########
Write Register Enter Register ########
Enter Reg. Value ########
Enter MAC Addr. Enter MAC Addr. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Table 6-11 Secondary service menu (continued)
ENWW Control-panel menus 201
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Scanner Settings Scan Test Mode Configure for scan test mode
ADF Starve Start ADF Starve Start (0–16)
ADF Starve Start [value]
ADF Starve Run ADF Starve Run (0–16)
ADF Starve Run [value]
Flatbed Starve Start FB Starve Start (0–16)
FB Starve Run [value]
Flatbed Starve Run FB Starve Run (0–16)
FB Starve Run [value]
Drop Bogey
Park Scanner
Formatter Test Configuring for formatter test
REINIT FFS
Reinitialize fax file system
R/W Parameter For information about this setting see, To
adjust fax data-store parameters
on page 200 and To change the telecom
country/region setting on page 200.
Monitor Test Onhook Monitor
Offhook Monitor
EavesdropMonitor
SigPower Monitor
LIU Test LIU Inputs
LIU ID
Loopback Test
Transmit Test OFFHOOK
ONHOOK
DIAL NUMBER
Dev. Reports
(Developer's Reports)
DS Fax
DS No Fax
Translations
Location codes
Error Diffusion
Table 6-12 Developer's menu (continued)
202 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Clock Dithering On
Off
Pick and Kick
Table 6-12 Developer's menu (continued)
ENWW Control-panel menus 203
Print problems
Print-quality problems
The information in the following sections helps you identify and resolve print-quality issues.
NOTE: If you are having copy problems, see Copy problems on page 214.
Improve print quality
Use the print-quality settings to prevent print-quality problems.
Print-quality settings
Print-quality settings affect how light or dark the print is on the page and the style in which the graphics
are printed. You can also use the print-quality settings to optimize the print quality for a specific media
type.
You can change the settings in the product properties to accommodate the types of jobs that you are
printing. The following settings are available, depending on the printer driver that you are using:
●600 dpi
●FastRes 1200
●ProRes1200 (132 Ipi)
●ProRes1200 (180 Ipi)
NOTE: Changing the resolution can change the formatting of your text.
To temporarily change print-quality settings
To change the print-quality settings only for the current software program, open the print properties
through the Print Setup menu in the program that you are using to print.
To change print-quality settings for all future jobs
NOTE: For Macintosh instructions, see the user guide.
For Windows 98, Windows 2000, and Windows Me:
1. In the Windows system tray, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Right-click the product icon.
3. Click Properties (in Windows 2000, you can also click Printing Preferences).
4. Change the settings, and then click OK.
For Windows XP:
1. In the Windows system tray, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the product icon.
204 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
3. Click Properties, or click Printing Preferences.
4. Change the settings, and click OK.
Identify and correct print defects
Use the checklist and print-quality issues charts in this section to solve print-quality problems.
Print-quality checklist
General print-quality problems can be solved by using the following checklist:
1. Make sure that the paper or print media that you are using meets specifications. Generally,
smoother paper provides better results.
2. If you are using a special print media such as labels, transparencies, glossy paper, or letterhead,
ensure that you have configured the product to printed by the correct type.
3. Print a Configuration page and Supplies Status page from the product control panel.
◦Check the Supplies Status page to see if any supplies are low or empty. No information is
provided for non-HP print cartridges.
4. Print a Demo page from the HP ToolboxFX. If the page prints, the problem is with the printer driver.
Try printing from another printer driver. For example, if you are using the PCL 6 printer driver, print
from the PS printer driver.
◦Use the Add Printer Wizard in the Printers (or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP) dialog
box to install the PS driver.
5. Try printing from a different program. If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the program
from which you were printing.
6. Restart the computer and the product and try printing again. If the problem is not resolved, see
General print-quality issues on page 205.
General print-quality issues
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge-first.
These examples illustrate problems that would affect all of the pages that you print. The examples
include the typical cause and solution for each of these problems.
ENWW Print problems 205
Problem Example Cause Solution
Print is light or faded. The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. Make sure that
the media meets specifications in
the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide.
The print cartridge might be low.
If you use a non-HP print
cartridge, no messages appear
on the product control panel or in
the HP ToolboxFX.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
If the print cartridge is not low or
empty, inspect the transfer roller
to see if it is damaged. If it is not ,
replace the print cartridge.
If the whole page is light, the print
density adjustment is too light or
EconoMode might be turned on.
Adjust the print density, and
disable EconoMode in the
product Properties.
Toner specks appear. The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. Make sure that
the media meets specifications in
the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide.
The paper path might need to be
cleaned.
Clean the paper path. See Clean
the paper path on page 56, or see
the HP ToolboxFX online Help.
Dropouts appear. A single sheet of print media
might be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
The moisture content of the
paper is uneven or the paper has
moist spots on its surface.
Try different paper, such as high-
quality paper that is intended for
laser printers.
The paper lot is flawed. The
manufacturing processes can
cause some areas to reject toner.
Try different paper, such as high-
quality paper that is intended for
laser printers.
The print cartridge might be
defective.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
Vertical streaks or bands appear
on the page.
The print cartridge might be low
or defective. If you are using a
non-HP print cartridge, no
messages appear on the product
control panel or in the
HP ToolboxFX.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
206 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem Example Cause Solution
The amount of background toner
shading becomes unacceptable.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use a different paper with a
lighter basis weight.
The single-sheet priority input
slot (tray 1) might be installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the single-sheet
priority input slot (tray 1) is in
place.
The print-density setting is too
high.
Decrease the print-density
setting through HP ToolboxFX or
the embedded Web server. This
decreases the amount of
background shading.
Very dry (low humidity)
conditions can increase the
amount of background shading.
Check the product environment.
The print cartridge might be low.
If you are using a non-HP print
cartridge, no messages appear
on the product control panel or in
the HP ToolboxFX.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
Toner smears appear on the
media.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. Make sure that
the media meets specifications in
the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide.
If toner smears appear on the
leading edge of the paper, the
media guides are dirty, or debris
has accumulated in the print
path.
Clean the media guides and the
paper path. See Clean the
product on page 49.
The print cartridge might be low.
If you are using a non-HP print
cartridge, no messages appear
on the product control panel or in
the HP ToolboxFX.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
The fuser temperature might be
too low.
In the printer driver, make sure
the appropriate media type is
selected.
ENWW Print problems 207
Problem Example Cause Solution
The toner smears easily when
touched.
The product is not set to print on
the type of media on which you
want to print.
In the printer driver, select the
Paper tab and set Type is to
match the type of media on which
you are printing. Print speed
might be slower if you are using
heavy paper.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. Make sure that
the media meets specifications in
the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide.
The paper path might need to be
cleaned.
Clean the product. See Clean the
product on page 49.
The power source might be
defective.
Plug the product directly into an
AC outlet instead of into a power
strip.
The print cartridge might be low.
If you are using a non-HP print
cartridge, no messages appear
on the product control panel or in
the HP ToolboxFX.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
Marks repeatedly appear at even
intervals on the page.
The product is not set to print on
the type of media on which you
want to print.
In the printer driver, make sure
that the appropriate media type is
selected. Print speed might be
slower if you are using heavy
paper.
Internal parts might have toner on
them.
The problem typically corrects
itself after a few more pages.
The paper path might need to be
cleaned.
Clean the product. See Clean the
product on page 49.
The print cartridge might be
damaged.
If a repetitive mark occurs at the
same spot on the page, install a
new HP print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge
on page 99.
The printed page contains
misformed characters.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use a different paper, such as
high-quality paper that is
intended for laser printers.
If characters are incorrectly
formed so that they produce a
wavy effect, the laser scanner
might need replacing.
Verify that the problem also
occurs on the Configuration
page. If so, replace the laser/
scanner. See Laser/scanner
(print engine) on page 137.
208 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem Example Cause Solution
The printed page is curled or
wavy.
The product is not set to print on
the type of media on which you
want to print.
In the printer driver, make sure
the appropriate media type is
selected.
If the problem persists, select a
media type that uses a lower
fuser temperature, such as
transparencies or light media.
The media might have been in
the input tray too long.
Turn over the stack of media in
the tray. Also, try rotating the
media 180° in the input tray.
The paper path is curling the
media.
Open the rear output door to print
to the straight-through output
path.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use a different paper, such as
high-quality paper that is
intended for laser printers.
Both high temperature and
humidity can cause paper curl.
Check the product environment.
Text or graphics are skewed on
the printed page.
The media might be loaded
incorrectly or the input tray might
be too full.
Verify that the media is loaded
correctly and that the media
guides are not too tight or too
loose against the stack. See
Load paper and print media
on page 26.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use a different paper, such as
high-quality paper that is
intended for laser printers.
The printed page contains
wrinkles or creases.
The media might be loaded
incorrectly or the input tray might
be too full.
Turn over the stack of paper in
the input tray, or try rotating the
paper 180° in the input tray.
Verify that the media is loaded
correctly and that the media
guides are not too tight or too
loose against the stack. See
Load paper and print media
on page 26.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use a different paper, such as
high-quality paper that is
intended for laser printers.
The paper path is curling the
media.
Open the rear output door to print
to the straight-through output
path.
Air pockets inside envelopes can
cause them to wrinkle.
Remove the envelope, flatten it,
and try printing again.
ENWW Print problems 209
Problem Example Cause Solution
Toner appears around the
printed characters.
The media might be loaded
incorrectly.
Turn over the stack of paper in
the tray.
If large amounts of toner have
scattered around the characters,
the paper might have high
resistivity.
Use a different paper, such as
high-quality paper that is
intended for laser printers.
An image that appears at the top
of the page (in solid black)
repeats farther down the page (in
a gray field).
Software settings might affect
image printing.
In your software program,
change the tone (darkness) of the
field in which the repeated image
appears.
In your software program, rotate
the whole page 180° to print the
lighter image first.
The order of images printed
might affect printing.
Change the order in which the
images are printed. For example,
have the lighter image at the top
of the page, and the darker image
farther down the page.
A power surge might have
affected the product.
If the defect occurs later in a print
job, turn the product off for 10
minutes, and then turn on the
product to restart the print job.
Droplets of water are deposited
on the trailing edge of the page.
Moisture in the product is
condensing on the fuser
assembly. In excessively hot and
humid areas, media retains
moisture.
NOTE: Water droplets do not
damage the product.
Try moving the product to a less
humid area. Try a different
media.
210 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Scan problems
Solve scanned-image problems
Problem Cause Solution
The scanned image is of poor quality. The original might be a second-
generation photo or picture.
●To eliminate the patterns, try
reducing the size of the image after
scanning.
●Print the scanned image to see if
the quality is better.
●Verify that your resolution and color
settings are correct for the type of
scan job that you are performing.
●For best results, use the flatbed
scanner for scanning, rather than
the automatic document feeder
(ADF).
The image that appears on the screen
might not be an accurate representation
of the quality of the scan.
●Try adjusting your computer
monitor settings to use more colors
(or levels of gray). Typically, you
make this adjustment by opening
Display in the Windows Control
Panel.
●Try adjusting the resolution and
color settings in the scanner
software.
The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
Use the media guides when you load the
originals into the ADF. See Load
documents to fax, copy, or scan
on page 26.
The scanner might be dirty. Clean the scanner. See Clean the
product on page 49.
The graphics settings might not be
suitable for the type of scan job that you
are performing.
Try changing the graphics settings.
ENWW Scan problems 211
Problem Cause Solution
Part of the image did not scan. The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
Use the media guides when you load the
originals into the ADF. See Load
documents to fax, copy, or scan
on page 26.
A colored background might be causing
images in the foreground to blend into
the background.
Try adjusting the settings before you
scan the original, or try enhancing the
image after you scan the original.
The original is longer than 381 mm
(15 inches).
The maximum scannable length is 381
mm (15 inches) when you use the
automatic document feeder (ADF) input
tray. If the page exceeds the maximum
length, the scanner stops. (Copies can
be longer.)
CAUTION: Do not try to pull the
original from the ADF; you might damage
the scanner or your original. See Clear
jams from the ADF on page 180.
The original is too small. The minimum size that the flatbed
scanner supports is 25 x 25 mm (1 x 1
inch). The minimum size that the ADF
supports is 127 x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches).
The original might be jammed. See Clear
jams on page 179.
The media size is incorrect. In Scan settings, make sure that the
input media size is large enough for the
document that you are scanning.
The scan takes too long. The resolution or color level is set too
high.
Change the resolution and color level
settings to the correct settings for your
job.
The software is set to scan in color. The system default is color, which takes
longer to scan even when scanning a
monochrome original. If you acquire an
image through TWAIN or WIA, you can
change the settings so that the original
scans in grayscale or black-and-white.
See the product software Help for
details.
A print job or copy job was sent before
you tried to scan.
If someone sent a print job or copy job
before you tried to scan, the scan will
start if the scanner is not busy. However,
because the product and scanner share
memory, the scan might be slower.
212 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Scan-quality problems
Prevent problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy and scan quality.
●Use the flatbed scanner, rather than the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray, to scan.
●Use high-quality originals.
●Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, which causes unclear
images. See Load paper and print media on page 26 for instructions.
●Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned page.
●If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, you might need to replace the
separation pad. See Replace the tray 2 and optional tray 3 separation pad on page 45.
●Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
Solve scan-quality problems
Problem Description Solution
Blank pages. The original might have been loaded
upside down.
In the automatic document feeder (ADF),
put the top end of the stack of originals
into the ADF input tray, with the media
stack face-up and the first page to be
scanned on top of the stack.
On the flatbed scanner, place the original
document face-down with the upper-left
corner of the document at the lower-right
corner of the glass.
Too light or dark. The resolution and color levels might be
set incorrectly.
Verify that you have the correct
resolution and color settings.
Unwanted lines. Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted
substance might be on the glass.
Clean the flatbed scanner surface. See
Clean the flatbed scanner glass
on page 49.
The ADF glass might be dirty. Clean the ADF glass. See Clean the
scanner-cover backing on page 51.
Black dots or streaks. Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted
substance might be on the glass.
Clean the flatbed scanner surface. See
Clean the flatbed scanner glass
on page 49.
Unclear text. The resolution and color levels may be
set incorrectly.
Verify that you have the correct
resolution and color settings.
ENWW Scan problems 213
Copy problems
Prevent problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:
●Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the
automatic document feeder (ADF).
●Use quality originals.
●Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images
and problems with the OCR program.
●Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
NOTE: Verify that the media meets HP specifications. If the media meets HP specifications, recurring
feed problems indicate the pickup roller or separation pad is worn.
Image problems
Problem Cause Solution
Images are missing or faded. The print-cartridge toner level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Remove
the print cartridge on page 99.
The original might be of poor quality. If your original is too light or damaged,
the copy might not be able to
compensate, even if you adjust the
contrast. If possible, find an original
document in better condition.
The original might have a colored
background.
Colored backgrounds might cause
images in the foreground to blend into
the background, or the background might
appear in a different shade. If possible,
use an original document without a
colored background.
Vertical white or faded stripes appear on
the copy.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
The print-cartridge toner level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Remove
the print cartridge on page 99.
214 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem Cause Solution
Unwanted lines appear on the copy. Tray 2 might not be installed correctly. Verify that the tray is in place.
The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass
might be dirty.
Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF
glass. See Clean the product
on page 49.
The photosensitive drum inside the print
cartridge might have been scratched.
Install a new HP print cartridge. See
Remove the print cartridge on page 99.
Black dots or streaks appear on the copy. Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted
substance might be on the automatic
document feeder (ADF) or flatbed
scanner.
Clean the product. See Clean the
product on page 49.
Copies are too light or dark. The printer driver or product software
settings might be incorrect.
Verify that the quality settings are
correct.
See the product software Help for more
information about changing the settings.
Text is unclear. The printer driver or product software
settings might be incorrect.
Verify that the quality settings are
correct.
See the product software Help for more
information about changing the settings.
Media-handling problems
Problem Cause Solution
Poor print quality or toner adhesion. The paper is too moist, too rough, too
heavy or too smooth, or it is embossed
or from a faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100
and 250 Sheffield, 4% to 6% moisture
content.
Dropouts, jamming, or curl. The paper has been stored incorrectly. Store paper flat in its moisture-proof
wrapping.
The paper has variability from one side
to the other.
Turn the paper over.
Excessive curl. The paper is too moist, has the wrong
grain direction, or is of short-grain
construction
Open the rear output bin, or use long-
grain paper.
The paper varies from one side to the
other.
Turn the stack over.
Jamming, damage to product The paper has cutouts or perforations. Use paper that is free of cutouts or
perforations.
ENWW Copy problems 215
Problem Cause Solution
Problems with feeding. The paper has ragged edges. Use high-quality paper that is made for
laser printers.
The paper varies from side-to-side. Turn the paper over.
The paper is too moist, too rough, too
heavy or too smooth, has the wrong grain
direction, or is of short-grain construction
or it is embossed or from a faulty paper
lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100
and 250 Sheffield, 4% to 6% moisture
content.
Open the rear output bin, or use long-
grain paper.
Print is skewed (crooked). The media guides might be incorrectly
adjusted.
Remove all media from the input tray,
straighten the stack, and then load the
media in the input tray again. Adjust the
media guides to the width and length of
the media that you are using and try
printing again.
More than one sheet feeds at one time. The media tray might be overloaded. Remove some of the media from the tray.
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or
damaged.
Verify that the media is not wrinkled,
folded, or damaged. Try printing on
media from a new or different package.
The product does not pull media from the
media input tray.
The product might be in manual feed
mode.
●If Manual feed appears on the
product control-panel display, press
OK to print the job.
●Verify that the product is not in
manual feed mode and print your
job again.
The pickup roller might be dirty or
damaged.
Replace the pickup roller. See Replace
the tray 2 pickup roller on page 40.
The paper-length adjustment control in
tray 2 or optional tray 3 is set at a length
that is greater than the media size.
Adjust the paper-length adjustment
control to the correct length.
216 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Performance problems
Problem Cause Solution
No copy came out. The input tray might be empty. Load media in the product. See Load
paper and print media on page 26 for
more information.
The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
In the automatic document feeder (ADF),
load the original with the narrow side
forward and the side to be scanned
facing up.
On the flatbed scanner, place the original
document face-down with the upper-left
corner of the document at the lower-right
corner of the glass.
Copies are blank. The sealing tape might not have been
removed from the print cartridge.
Remove the print cartridge from the
product, pull out the sealing tape, and
then reinstall the print cartridge.
The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
In the ADF, load the original with the
narrow side forward and the side to be
scanned facing up.
On the flatbed scanner, make sure that
the original document is placed face-
down with the upper-left corner of the
document at the lower-right corner of the
glass.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
The print-cartridge toner level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Remove
the print cartridge on page 99.
The wrong original was copied. The ADF might be loaded. Make sure that the ADF is empty.
Copies are reduced in size. The product software settings might be
set to reduce the scanned image.
See the HP ToolboxFX Help for more
information about changing the settings.
ENWW Copy problems 217
Fax problems
General fax problem-solve
Verify the following information before problem-solving fax problems.
●Is the fax set up correctly?
◦Make sure that the fax cord that came with the product is the cord that is being used. This
cord has been tested and meets the device specifications.
◦Make sure that the fax cord is installed in the correct port. The fax cord (from the wall
receptacle) must be plugged into the line port ( ).
◦Additional devices connected to the product must use the telephone port ( )
●What type of telephone line is being used?
◦Dedicated telephone line: a unique telephone line that is assigned to receive or send a fax.
The fax cord must be plugged into the line port.
◦Shared telephone line: a telephone line that receives or sends voice calls and faxes. A single,
shared telephone line can perform only one function at a time. A fax cannot be sent while
someone is talking on the telephone or while a computer is connecting to the Internet.
◦Roll-over lines: a telephone system feature that allows an incoming call to be forwarded to
the next available telephone line (used with multiple-telephone-line systems). Try attaching
the device to the first incoming telephone line. The product will answer the telephone after it
rings the number of times that is specified in the product rings-to-answer setting.
◦Downstream phone: a phone that is plugged directly into the phone connector on the product.
◦Extension phone: a phone that is uses the same phone line as the product, but is connected
to a separate phone wall recepticle.
◦Distinctive ring service: a telephone system feature that can assign two telephone numbers
to one physical line, and assign a distinctive ring pattern to each number. Make sure that the
device is set to respond to the correct distinctive ring pattern that the telephone service
provider assigned to the fax number. This service is not available in all countries/regions.
Make sure that the telephone company provides this service before changing the setting. For
more information about distinctive ring service, see Distinctive ring function on page 88.
●Is a telephone-line splitting device installed?
◦A telephone-line splitter is a device that splits two or more telephone lines from the same jack.
Not all splitters are compatible with the device, and not all countries/regions support the use
of splitters.
Parallel splitters (also called T-splitters) split a single line into two phone jacks so that two
devices can share the same line. Line 1/Line 2 splitters provide two unique telephone line
outlets from a single jack with two unique telephone numbers (two telephone lines are
connected to a single jack). A Line 1/Line 2 splitter must be used if both a fax line and a voice
line share the same jack.
218 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
NOTE: Hewlett-Packard does not recommend using a parallel splitter (T-splitter) with the
product because it might degrade the quality of the telephone signal. If a second device must
be attached to the telephone line in addition to the product, plug the second device into the
telephone port on the product (the port on the back that is marked with a telephone icon).
●Is a surge-protection device installed?
◦A surge-protection device might be installed between the telephone jack and the product to
protect the product from electrical power that passes through the telephone lines. These
devices might cause some fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the
telephone signal. If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes, connect the device
directly to the telephone jack to determine if the problem is in the surge-protection device.
●Is a telephone company voice-message service being used?
◦If the messaging service rings-to-answer setting is lower than the product rings-to-answer
setting, the messaging service answers the call and the product will not detect incoming faxes.
If the product rings-to-answer setting is lower than that of the messaging service, the product
answers all calls and no calls will ever be sent to the messaging service. The only voice-
messaging system that can be used with the product is a standard telephone-answering
machine.
●Is a standard telephone-answering machine installed?
◦An answering machine must be connected to the port that is labeled with the telephone icon
(or it can be shared on the same telephone-line extension). Set the product rings-to-answer
setting for at least one ring more than the number of rings that prompts the answering machine
to answer an incoming call. For example, if the answering machine is set to answer calls after
three rings, set the product rings-to-answer setting to four rings.
NOTE: If an answering machine is connected to the same telephone line, but is connected to a
different jack (for example, in another room), it might interfere with the product fax reception.
Problems receiving faxes
Use the table in this section to solve problems that might occur when receiving faxes.
NOTE: You must use the fax cord that came with the product in order to ensure that the product
functions correctly.
Problem Cause Solution
The product cannot receive faxes from
an extension telephone.
The extension-telephone setting might
be disabled.
Verify that the extension-telephone
setting is enabled.
The fax cord might not be securely
connected.
Verify that the fax cord is securely
connected between the telephone jack
and the product (or another device that is
connected to the product). Press 1-2-3 in
sequence (tone-dial mode only), wait for
three seconds, and then hang up.
The product dialing mode might be
incorrectly set, or the extension phone
might be incorrectly set.
Verify that the product dialing mode is set
to Tone. Verify that the extension phone
is set to On for tone dialing as well.
ENWW Fax problems 219
Problem Cause Solution
The product is not answering incoming
fax calls.
The answer mode might be set to
Manual.
If the answer mode is set to Manual, the
product does not answer calls. You have
to start the fax-receiving process
manually.
The rings-to-answer setting might not be
set correctly.
Check the rings-to-answer setting for
your configuration.
The answer-ring pattern feature might be
turned on, but you do not have the
service, or you do have the service and
the feature is not set correctly.
Check the answer-ring pattern feature to
verify that it is set properly.
The fax cord might not be correctly
connected, or the fax cord is not working.
See the Getting Started Guide to check
the installation. Verify that you are using
the fax cord that came with the product.
The product might not be able to detect
incoming fax tones because the
answering machine is playing a voice
message.
Re-record your answering machine
message, leaving at least two seconds of
silence at the beginning of the message.
Too many devices might be connected to
the telephone line.
You should not have more than three
devices attached to the line. Try
removing the last device that was
connected and determine whether the
product works. If not, continue removing
devices one at a time and retry after
removing each one.
The telephone line might not be working. Do one of the following:
●Increase the volume on the product,
and then press Start Fax on the
control panel. If you hear a dial tone,
the telephone line is working.
●Disconnect the product from the
telephone jack, and then connect a
telephone. Try to make a telephone
call to verify that the telephone line
is working.
220 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem Cause Solution
The product is not answering incoming
fax calls.
A voice-messaging service might be
interfering with the product as it attempts
to answer calls.
Do one of the following:
●Disable the messaging service.
●Get a telephone line that is
dedicated to fax calls.
●Set the product answer mode to
Manual. In manual mode, you must
start the fax-receive process
yourself.
●Leave the product set to automatic
mode and lower the rings-to-
answer setting for the product to a
number less than the rings-to-
answer setting for the voice mail.
The product will answer all
incoming calls.
The product might be out of paper and
the memory is full.
Refill the media input tray. Press OK. The
product prints all of the faxes it has saved
in memory and then resumes answering
fax calls.
Faxes are not printing. The media input tray is empty. Load media. Any faxes that are received
while the input tray is empty are stored in
memory and will print after the tray has
been refilled.
The receive-to-PC option might be
selected, and faxes are being received
by the computer.
Check to determine whether the
computer is receiving faxes.
Faxes are printing on two pages instead
of one.
The auto reduction setting might not be
set correctly.
Turn on the auto reduction setting.
The incoming faxes might have been
sent on larger media.
Adjust the auto reduction setting to allow
larger pages to be printed on one page.
Received faxes are too light or are
printing only on half of the page.
The product ran out of toner while
printing a fax.
The product stores the most recently
printed faxes. (The amount of memory
that is available determines the actual
number of faxes stored for reprinting.) As
soon as possible, replace the print
cartridge, and then reprint the fax.
The fax that was sent was too light. Contact the sender and have the sender
resend the fax after altering the settings.
ENWW Fax problems 221
Problems sending faxes
Problem Cause Solution
The document stops feeding in the
middle of faxing.
The maximum length of a page that you
can load is 381 mm (15 inches). Faxing
of a longer page stops at 381 mm
(15 inches).
Print the document on shorter media.
If no jam exists and less than one minute
has elapsed, wait a moment before
pressing Cancel. If a jam exists, see
Clear jams on page 179. Then, resend
the job.
If the item is too small, it can jam inside
the automatic document feeder (ADF).
Use the flatbed scanner. The minimum
page size for the ADF is 127 x 127 mm
(5 x 5 inches).
If a jam exists, see Clear jams from the
ADF on page 180. Then, resend the job.
Faxes stop during sending. The fax machine to which you are
sending might be malfunctioning.
Try sending to another fax machine.
Your telephone line might not be
working.
Do one of the following:
●Turn up the volume on the product,
and then press Start Fax on the
control panel. If you hear a dial tone,
the telephone line is working.
●Disconnect the product from the
jack in the wall, and then connect a
telephone to the jack. Try to make a
telephone call to verify that the
telephone line is working.
A communication error might be
interrupting the fax job.
Change the redial-on-communication-
error setting to On.
The product is receiving faxes but is not
sending them.
If your product is on a PBX system, the
PBX system might be generating a digital
tone that the product cannot detect.
Disable the detect-dial-tone setting.
A poor telephone connection might exist. Try again later.
The fax machine to which you are
sending might be malfunctioning.
Try sending to another fax machine.
Your telephone line might not be
working.
Do one of the following:
●Turn up the volume on the product
and press Start Fax on the control
panel. If you hear a dial tone, the
telephone line is working.
●Disconnect the product from the
telephone jack and connect a
telephone. Try to make a telephone
call to verify that the telephone line
is working.
Outgoing fax calls continue to be dialed. The product automatically redials a fax
number if the redial options are set to
On.
To stop the redials while the product is
dialing, press Cancel.
222 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem Cause Solution
Faxes that you send are not arriving at
the receiving fax machine.
The receiving fax machine might be off
or might have an error condition, such as
being out of paper.
Call the recipient to verify that the fax
machine is on and ready to receive
faxes.
The originals might be incorrectly loaded. Verify that the original documents are
correctly loaded into the ADF input tray
or flatbed scanner. See Load paper and
print media on page 26.
A fax might be in memory because it is
waiting to redial a busy number, other
jobs that are ahead of it are waiting to be
sent, or the fax is set up for a delayed
send.
If a fax job is in memory for any of these
reasons, an entry for the job appears in
the fax log. Print the fax activity log and
check the Status column for jobs that
show a Pending designation.
Faxes you send include a block of gray
shading at the end of each page.
You might be sending a fax from the
flatbed scanner with the glass-fax size
set incorrectly.
Verify that the setting is correct.
Faxes you send have data missing from
the end of each page.
You might be sending a fax from the
flatbed scanner with the glass-fax size
set incorrectly.
Verify that the setting is correct.
You receive a Low Memory error. You might be sending a fax that is too
large, or the resolution might be too high.
Try one of the following:
●Divide a large fax into smaller
sections, and then fax them
individually.
●Clear stored faxes to make more
memory available for outgoing
faxes.
●Configure the outgoing fax as a
delayed fax, and then verify that it
will send completely.
●Make sure that you are using the
lowest resolution setting
(Standard).
●Turn the product power off and then
on.
ENWW Fax problems 223
Voice-call problems
Problem Cause Solution
The telephone or answering machine
that is connected to the line is not
receiving voice calls.
The fax cord might not be correctly
connected.
See the Getting Started Guide to check
the installation. The product must be the
first device connected to the telephone
line.
The answer mode or rings-to-answer
settings might not be correctly set.
The rings-to-answer must be set higher
than the answering machine setting.
The answering machine or telephone
might not be functioning.
Connect the telephone or answering
machine directly to the telephone line
and determine if it works by itself.
The problem persists. See the Fax chapter in the product user
guide.
224 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Media-handling problems
NOTE: For information about removing jams, see Clear jams on page 179.
Problem Cause Solution
Print is skewed (crooked). The media input tray might be
overloaded.
Remove some of the media from the
input tray.
The media guides might be incorrectly
set, broken, or missing.
Verify that the guides are not adjusted
too tightly or too loosely against the
paper. Check for broken or missing
guides, and replace them if necessary.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
Pages are curled or wrinkled. The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
The paper path might be affecting the
pages.
Open the rear output door on the back of
the product and use this paper path.
The media is not stored properly. When possible, store media in its sealed
ream at room temperature.
The media has been in the input tray too
long.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray
or rotate the media 180° in the paper tray.
ENWW Fax problems 225
Performance problems
Problem Cause Solution
Faxes are transmitting or being received
very slowly.
The fax might be very complex, such as
one with many graphics.
Complex faxes take longer to be sent or
received. Breaking longer faxes into
multiple jobs can increase the
transmission speed.
The receiving fax machine might have a
slow modem speed.
The product only sends the fax at the
fastest modem speed that the receiving
fax machine can accept.
The resolution at which the fax was sent
or is being received might be very high.
If you are receiving the fax, call and ask
the sender to lower the resolution and
resend the fax. If you are sending the fax,
lower the resolution and resend the fax.
Your telephone line might not be
working.
Hang up and resend the fax. Have the
telephone company check the telephone
line.
You are sending a fax via an international
call.
You must allow more time to transmit fax
jobs internationally.
The fax activity logs or fax call reports are
printing at inappropriate times.
The fax activity log or fax call reports
settings are not correct.
Print a Configuration page and check
when the reports print.
The product sounds are too loud or too
soft.
The volume setting might not be adjusted
correctly.
Adjust the volume setting.
226 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Control-panel display problems
CAUTION: Static electricity can cause unexpected black lines or dots to appear on the product control-
panel display. Do not touch the product control-panel display if there is a chance that you have collected
a static electric charge (for example, by walking on carpet in a low-humidity environment).
Unexpected lines or dots might appear on the product control-panel display, or the display might become
blank if the product is exposed to an electric or magnetic field. To resolve this problem, perform the
following procedure:
1. Turn the product off.
2. Remove the product from the electric or magnetic field.
3. Turn the product on again.
NOTE: If the product uses the Asian character display PCA and the formatter was recently
replaced, make sure that the PCA is installed correctly and fully seated in the formatter
connector (H3).
Convenience-stapler problems (HP LaserJet M2727nfs
only)
The convenience stapler is designed to be free of staple jams. To reduce the risk of staple jams, make
sure that you staple 20 or fewer pages of media (80 g/m
2
or 20 lb) at a time.
The convenience stapler does not staple pages.
Cause Solution
The convenience-stapler door is not completely closed. Make sure that the convenience-stapler door is completely
closed.
The convenience stapler has a staple jam. Clear the staple jam. See Clear jams from the convenience
stapler (HP LaserJet M2727nfs MFP only) on page 189.
ENWW Control-panel display problems 227
DSL problems
A digital subscriber line (DSL) uses digital technology over standard copper phone wires. These DSL
services rely on an AM signal. The product is a Group 3 fax device, which operates below the DSL
capability and is not directly compatible with digital signals. However, if the configuration is specified
during the DSL line setup, the signal on a DSL line can be separated so that some of the bandwidth is
used to transmit an analog signal (for voice and fax), while the remaining bandwidth transmits digital
data. Split the signal to use both the telephone or fax and the computer on the same line and at the
same time.
NOTE: Not all printers and faxes are compatible with DSL services. HP does not guarantee that the
HP LaserJet product will be compatible with all DSL service lines or providers.
The DSL modem requires a high-pass filter. When DSL service is installed, the service provider
sometimes supplies a splitter, which includes a low-pass filter, for the normal phone wiring. If not, the
user should contact the DSL provider to request a filter or splitter so that a fax modem can operate on
the line.
NOTE: HP recommends discussing the DSL-line setup options with the DSL service provider. Consult
the DSL provider for technical installation requirements.
An Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) is a version of DSL that provides greater efficiency by
allowing upload and download rates to differ. Because ADSL is a version of DSL, the previous DSL
information also applies to ADSL.
PABX line problems
The HP LaserJet product is an analog device that is not compatible with all digital phone environments
(unless a digital-to-analog converter is used). It might be difficult for you to problem solve fax issues
without assistance from someone who is familiar with the technical details of the customer’s digital
environment and the analog converter. HP does not guarantee that the HP LaserJet product will be
compatible with digital environments or digital-to-analog converters.
228 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
ADF problems
The “Document loaded” message continually appears on the control-panel display.
Cause Solution
The ADF paper-sensor flag is damaged. Replace the ADF. See ADF assembly on page 115.
The “Scanner error” message continually appears on the control-panel display.
Cause Solution
The ADF-to-scanner connector is not connected correctly or
the ADF is not functioning.
Reseat the connector. If the problem persists, replace the ADF.
See ADF assembly on page 115.
The ADF pickup roller does not move.
Cause Solution
The ADF-to-scanner connector is not connected correctly or
the ADF is not functioning.
Reseat the connector. If the problem persists, replace the ADF.
See ADF assembly on page 115.
The ADF makes grinding, squeaking, or rubbing noises when a sheet feeds from the ADF input tray.
Cause Solution
The wrong ADF pickup-roller assembly is installed. Make sure that the correct roller assembly is installed. If the
problem persists, replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly. See
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 110.
The sheet begins to feed from the ADF input tray, but does not completely move through the ADF. The sheet can be
pushed through the ADF by hand.
Cause Solution
The cleanout comb is not installed or is incorrectly installed. Make sure that the cleanout comb is installed correctly.
The ADF pickup rollers are dirty. Clean the rollers. See Clean the ADF pickup-roller assembly
on page 55.
The media is curled or was stored in a high-humidity
environment.
Use media that meets HP recommendations. See the user
guide for media specifications.
The ADF pickup-roller assembly is damaged or is not
functioning.
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly. See Replace the
ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 110.
The sheet begins to feed from the ADF input tray, but does not move through the ADF completely. The sheet cannot
be pushed through the ADF by hand.
Cause Solution
The ADF pickup-roller assembly is damaged or is not
functioning.
Replace the ADF pickup-roller assembly. See Replace the
ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 110.
ENWW ADF problems 229
Functional checks
Drum rotation test
The photosensitive drum, located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work.
The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main-drive assembly.
NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges have been used.
1. Open the print-cartridge door.
2. Remove the print cartridge.
3. Mark the drive gear on the cartridge with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark.
4. Install the print cartridge and close the print-cartridge door. The startup sequence should rotate the
drum enough to move the mark.
5. Open the print-cartridge door and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark
moved.
If the mark did not move, inspect the main-drive assembly to make sure that it is meshing with the print
cartridge gears. If the drive gears appear functional and the drum does not move, replace the print
cartridge.
230 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Engine test
The engine test is used to verify that the print engine is functioning correctly. The formatter is bypassed
during the engine test.
To perform an engine test
1. Remove the left cover. See Left cover on page 102.
2. Use a non-conductive probe to depress the engine-test switch. A single test page prints.
CAUTION: Use a non-conductive probe to depress the engine test switch. Inserting a conductive
probe to depress the switch can damage the product.
NOTE: The formatter must be connected to the ECU in order to perform an engine test.
Otherwise, the product does not print.
Figure 6-1 Engine test switch
ENWW Functional checks 231
Half self-test functional check
The print process can be subdivided into the following stages:
●Image formation stage (charges the drum and writes a latent image to the drum with the laser)
●Development stage (forms a toner image on the drum)
●Transfer stage (transfers the image to the media)
●Cleaning stage (removes excess toner from the drum)
●Fusing stage (applies heat and pressure to the media to make the image permanent)
Perform a half self-test check
The purpose of the half self-test check is to determine which process is malfunctioning.
1. Print a configuration page.
2. Open the print-cartridge access door after the paper advances halfway through the product
(approximately five seconds after the motor begins rotating). The leading edge of the paper should
have advanced past the print cartridge.
3. Remove the print cartridge.
4. Open the print-cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is
present on the drum surface, assume that the first two functions of the electrophotographic process
are functioning (image formation and development). Problem solve the failure as a transfer or fusing
problem.
Perform other checks
If no image appears on the photosensitive drum, perform these checks:
1. Make sure that you removed the entire length of the sealing tape from the print cartridge before
you installed the cartridge.
2. Perform a drum-rotation functional check to ensure that the drum is rotating (see Drum rotation
test on page 230).
3. Perform a high-voltage power-supply check. See Heating element check on page 233.
232 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Heating element check
Media passes between the heating element and a soft pressure roller to fuse toner to the media.
1. Unplug the product for at least ten minutes.
2. Verify that the thermistor connector is seated into both the product chassis and the ECU.
3. Remove the heating element connector from the ECU. To measure the continuity of the heating
element, measure the resistance between the two pins at the end of the cable.
NOTE: Normal resistance is 25 ohms +/- 10 ohms for the 110 V product and 80 ohms +/- 20 ohms
for the 220 V product.
If no resistance is measured, replace the fuser.
4. Remove the thermistor connector, and then measure the resistance between J206 pins one and
two and between J206 pins three and four.
NOTE: Normal resistance between both pairs of pins is 370K ohms +/- 50K ohms at 20°C (68°
F).
5. If no resistance is measured, replace the fuser.
High-voltage contacts check
The high-voltage contacts in the product must have a good connection with the contacts on the print
cartridge to provide the necessary voltages for the electrophotographic processes.
Check the print-cartridge contacts
Remove the print cartridge and visually inspect the three connection points on the ends of the print
cartridge: drum ground (callout 1), charging (callout 2), and developing roller (callout 3). If they are dirty
or corroded, clean the connection. If they are damaged, replace the print cartridge.
NOTE: Use only isopropyl alcohol to clean the connections.
Figure 6-2 Print-cartridge high-voltage connection points (right side)
1
ENWW Functional checks 233
Figure 6-3 Print-cartridge high-voltage connection points (left side)
2
3
Check the high-voltage connector assembly
Visually inspect the cartridge connection points inside the product to make sure that they are not dirty
or corroded. If the pins are dirty, clean them by using isopropyl alcohol only.
234 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Service-mode functions
NVRAM initialization
An NVRAM initialization will return the following device settings to the factory-set defaults:
●All menu settings, including the fax header and company name
●Fax numbers and names that are associated with one-touch keys and speed-dial codes
Additionally, all faxes stored in memory are cleared.
Perform an NVRAM initialization
1. Turn off the product.
2. Simultaneously press and hold the Cancel button and the right arrow button (> ), and then turn on
the product.
3. Wait until the message Permanent storage init. appears, and then release the Cancel and right
arrow buttons.
When the NVRAM initialization process has been completed, the device control panel shows the
Ready message.
Super NVRAM initialization
A Super NVRAM initialization will return all of the device settings to the factory-set defaults (generic
product mode).
NOTE: When the product is turned on, you will be prompted to select the language and country/region
setting before the product will initialize.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Simultaneously press and hold the Cancel button and the left arrow button (< ), and then turn on
the product.
3. Wait until the message Permanent storage init. appears, and then release the Cancel and left
arrow buttons.
Service menu
NOTE: An asterisk (*) symbol next to a service submenu option indicates that this is the current setting
for that option.
For more information about using the service menu, see Service menu on page 241.
Access the service menu
1. Press the Setup button.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Main Menu Service, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select the desired secondary-service option, and then press the OK
button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the desired submenu option, and then press OK .
ENWW Service-mode functions 235
Service menu item Submenu option Description
Print T.30 trace At end of call*
Never
Now
If error
Use a T.30 trace report to problem solve
fax transmission and receive errors.
Archive print Off*
On
The archive print feature produces
output that is less susceptible to toner
smearing and dusting. Use archive print
to create documents that you want to
preserve or archive.
Less paper curl Off*
On
Lowers the fuser temperature.
Cleaning mode None Press OK to start the cleaning process.
See Clean the paper path on page 56 for
more information.
Restore defaults None CAUTION: This procedure clears fax
numbers and names that are associated
with one-touch keys and speed-dial
codes, and deletes any pages that are
stored in the memory. The procedure
then automatically restarts the product.
Press OK to restore the product factory
settings.
236 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Problem-solve tools
Product information pages and reports
Information pages and reports reside within the product memory. These pages and reports help
diagnose and solve problems with the product.
NOTE: If the product language was not correctly set during installation, you can set the language
manually so the information pages print in one of the supported languages. Change the language by
using the System setup menu on the control panel or by using the embedded Web server.
Configuration page
The Configuration page shows the current settings and product properties. Print a Configuration page
from the product or HP ToolboxFX. To print from the product, complete the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Config report, and then press OK.
A second page also prints. On that page, the Fax Settings section provides details about the product
fax settings.
Supplies Status page
The Supplies Status page shows the remaining life of the HP print cartridge, the estimated pages
remaining, the number of pages printed, and other supplies information. Print a Supplies Status page
from the product or HP ToolboxFX. To print from the product, complete the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Supplies Status, and then press OK.
PCL, PCL 6, or PS font list
The PCL, PCL 6, or PS font list shows which fonts are currently installed in the product. To print the
PCL, PCL 6, or PS font list, complete the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select PCL font list, PS font list, or PCL 6 font list, and then press
OK.
ENWW Problem-solve tools 237
Demo page
The Demo page contains examples of text and graphics. To print the Demo page, complete the following
steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Demo page, and then press OK.
Usage page
The Usage page shows a page count for each size of paper printed, the number of one-sided (simplexed)
or two-sided (duplexed) pages, and the avarage percentage of coverage. To print the Usage page,
complete the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Usage page, and then press OK.
Menu map
The Menu map shows the control-panel menus and available settings. To print the Menu map, complete
the following steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Menu structure, and then press OK.
Network report
The Menu map shows the product network settings. To print the Network report, complete the following
steps:
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Network report, and then press OK.
238 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Fax reports
This section describes the fax reports that help you diagnose and solve problems with the product.
Fax activity log
The fax activity log provides a chronological history of the last 40 faxes that were received, sent, or
deleted, and any errors that occurred.
To print the fax activity log
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Activity log, and then press OK.
4. Press OK to select Print log now. The product exits the menu settings and prints the log.
Fax call report
A fax call report is a brief report that indicates the status of the last fax that was sent or received.
To print a fax call report
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Call report, and then press OK.
4. Press OK to select Print report now. The product exits the menu settings and prints the report.
Phone book report
A phone book report lists the fax numbers that are assigned to the one-touch buttons and speed-dial
and group-dial entries.
To print a phone book report
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select PhoneBook report, and then press OK. The product exits the
menu settings and prints the report.
ENWW Problem-solve tools 239
Billing-code report
The billing-code report is a printed list of all of the fax billing codes and the total number of faxes that
have been billed to each code.
NOTE: After this report is printed, all billing data is deleted.
To print a billing-code report
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Billing report, and then press OK. The product exits the menu
settings and prints the report.
HP ToolboxFX
HP ToolboxFX is a product configuration and problem solving tool.
To view HP ToolboxFX
Open HP ToolboxFX in one of these ways:
●On the Windows desktop, double-click the HP ToolboxFX icon.
●On the Windows Start menu, click Programs (All Programs in Windows XP), and then click
HP ToolboxFX.
Troubleshooting tab
HP ToolboxFX includes a Troubleshooting tab that contains links to the following main pages:
●Control Panel Messages. View descriptions of product control-panel messages.
●Clearing Jams. View information about locating and clearing jams.
●Print Problems. View Help topics that can help you solve print problems.
●Scan Problems. View Help topics that can help you solve scan problems.
●Copy Problems. View Help topics that can help you solve copy problems.
●Fax Problems. View Help topics that can help you solve fax problems.
●Connectivity Problems. View Help topics that can help you solve networking problems.
●Troubleshooting Tools. Employ such problem-solving tools as a cleaning page to maintain the
product.
●Animated Demonstrations. View animated Help demonstrations for the product.
NOTE: Other HP ToolboxFX tabs might be helpful in solving product problems.
240 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Service menu
Use the control-panel Service menu to solve product problems.
Restore the factory-set defaults
Restoring the factory-set defaults returns all of the settings to the factory defaults, and it also clears the
fax header name and phone number.
CAUTION: This procedure clears fax numbers and names that are associated with one-touch keys
and speed-dial codes, and deletes any pages that are stored in the memory. The procedure then
automatically restarts the product.
Restore the factory-set defaults
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Restore defaults, and then press OK.
The product automatically restarts.
Clean the paper path
The product features a special cleaning mode to clean the paper path.
NOTE: If you have access to HP ToolboxFX, HP recommends cleaning the paper path by using
HP ToolboxFX.
Clean the paper path
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Cleaning Mode, and then press OK.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.
5. Press OK again to confirm and begin the cleaning process.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.
ENWW Problem-solve tools 241
T.30 protocol trace
Use a T.30 protocol trace report to problem-solve fax transmission issues.
Print a T.30 protocol trace report
Send a fax from the product or receive a fax to the product from another fax machine, and then print a
T.30 trace report after the fax prints.
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Print T.30, and then press OK.
The product exits the menu settings and prints the reports.
Archive print
Archive print produces output that is less susceptible to toner smearing and dusting. Use archive print
to create documents that you want to preserve or archive.
Turn on archive print
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Archive print, On, or Off, and then press OK.
242 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
Firmware updates
The product has a flash-memory-based formatter that enables the firmware code to be updated in the
event that new firmware is released for the product. Using flash memory also provides a way to recover
the firmware in the event of code corruption or failure.
Firmware update by using a flash executable file
The configuration page lists the firmware version of the product. On the flash-memory-based product,
you can update the firmware code by downloading the latest flash executable file for the product and
running the program according to the readme instructions that come with it (go to www.hp.com). Turn
the product off and then on before running the executable file. If the firmware becomes corrupted or fails
(usually because of an interruption when attempting to update the firmware), the product no longer
functions and will require the formatter be replaced.
ENWW Firmware updates 243
244 Chapter 6 Solve problems ENWW
7Parts
●Accessories and ordering information
●Supplies
●Memory
●Cable and interface accessories
●Paper-handling accessories
●Whole unit replacement
●Scanner/ADF replacement parts
●Control-panel bezels
●Supplementary documentation and support
●Problem-solve diagrams
●Parts lists and diagrams
●Scanner and ADF assemblies
●Scanner components
●ADF components
●Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
●Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate
●External covers and panels
●Cartridge door assembly
●Internal components (1 of 4)
●Internal components (2 of 4)
●Internal components (3 of 4)
●Internal components (4 of 4)
●Engine-controller assembly (ECU)
●Main-drive assembly
●Duplexing-drive assembly
ENWW 245
●Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder
●Duplexing assembly
●Fuser assembly
●Alphabetical parts list
●Numerical parts list
246 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Accessories and ordering information
Order replacement parts from the following Web sites:
●HP Parts Store: www.partsdirect.hp.com or www2.hp.com/hpparts/default.asp
Order supplies from the following Web sites:
●To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies.
●To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html.
●To order supplies in Canada, go to www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies.
●To order supplies in Europe, go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
●To order supplies in Asia-Pacific, go to www.hp.com/paper/.
●To order accessories, go to www.hp.com/go/accessories.
ENWW Accessories and ordering information 247
Supplies
Item Description Part number
Black print cartridge Average yield for the standard print
cartridge is approximately 3,500 pages.
Average yield for the extended print
cartridge is approximately 7,000 pages
Actual yield depends on use.
Standard: Q7553A (standard; new)
Q7553–67901 (standard; exchange)
Extended life: Q7553X (extended life;
new)
Q7553–67902 (extended life; exchange)
Staple cassette (2 pack) 1,500-staple capacity each Q7432A (retail)
Q7432–67001 (service)
Memory
Item Description Part number
Memory upgrades (DIMMs) The standard 64 MB of memory in the
product can be expanded to up to
320 MB upgrading the DIMM.
64 MB
CB421A
Memory upgrades (DIMMs) 128 MB CB422A
Memory upgrades (DIMMs) 256 MB CB423A
Cable and interface accessories
Item Description Part number
USB cable 2-meter (6.56 feet) standard USB-
compatible device connector
C6518A
3-meter (9.84 feet) standard USB-
compatible device connector
C6520A
HP Wireless Printing Upgrade Kit Printing adapter for wireless point-to-
point printing
Q6259A
Fax cord Two-wire phone cord adapter 8121–0811
Fax dongle Two-wire to four-wire adapter (US) Q3093–80004
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) US/Canada 8120-8382
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) Europe 8121-0516
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) Switzerland 8121-0519
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) United Kingdom 8121-0517
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) Danish 8121-0518
248 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Item Description Part number
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) South America 8121-0520
Power cord 1.8 meter (6 feet) Israel 8121-1004
Paper-handling accessories
Item Description Part number
Optional tray 3 cassette/feeder 250-sheet input tray/feeder for standard
sizes. Only one optional 250-sheet tray
can be installed.
Q7556A (new)
Q7556-67901 (service)
Tray 2 cassette 250-sheet input tray for standard sizes RM1-4251-000CN
Staple cassette (2 pack) 1,500-staple capacity each Q7432A (retail)
Q7432–67001 (service)
ENWW Paper-handling accessories 249
Whole unit replacement
Use the tables in this section to find the whole unit replacement part number for a specific product bundle
and localized configuration.
Table 7-1 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB532A
Country/region Localized configuration Replacement part number
Asia Pacific AB0 - Taiwan-Traditional Chinese CB532-67906
AB1 - Korea-Korean localization CB532-67907
AB2 - China-Simplified Chinese CB532-67908
AB3 - Thailand-Thai CB532-67909
AB4 - Singapore-English CB532-67910
BFV - Hong Kong SAR-English/Traditional Chinese CB532-67911
ABG - Australia-English CB532-67912
A2K - Philippines-English CB532-67913
ACJ - India-English CB532-67914
AK3 - Indonesia - Indonesia localizaton CB532-67915
AR7 - New Zealand-English CB532-67916
UUD - Vietnam-Vietnamese localization CB532-67917
ARR - Asia Pacific (Euro Cord)-English CB532-67918
ARS - Asia Pacific (UK Cord)-English CB532-67919
250 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Country/region Localized configuration Replacement part number
Europe, Middle East, and Africa ABD - Germany-German CB532-67921
ABF - France-French CB532-67922
ABH - Netherlands-Dutch CB532-67923
ABZ - Italy-Italian CB532-67924
ABE - Spain - Spanish localization CB532-67925
BFY - Spain-Catalan localization CB532-67926
ABU - United Kingdom-English CB532-67927
B14 - Belgium-Dutch/French CB532-67928
AR8 - Switzerland-French/German CB532-67929
BB1 - Norway/Finland/Sweden-NO/FI/SV
localization
CB532-67930
ABY - Denmark-Danish CB532-67931
ACB - Russia-Cyrillic CB532-67932
BCM - Czech Rep/Slovakia - Czech/Slovak
localization
CB532-67933
AKC - Hungary - Hungarian localization CB532-67934
AKD - Poland - Polish localization CB532-67935
AB9 - Portugal - Portuguese localization CB532-67936
ACQ - South Africa-English CB532-67937
BCP - Greece/Israel - Greek/Hebrew localization CB532-67938
BFQ - Mid East 220V-AR/FR/EN localization CB532-67939
BFR - Estonia/Lithuania/Latvia-ET/LT/LV CB532-67940
BFS - Slovenia/Croatia/Serbia-SL/HR/SR CB532-67941
BFZ - Kazakhstan/Ukraine-Kazakh/Ukrainian
locization
CB532-67942
AB8 - Turkey - Turkish localization CB532-67943
BG1 - Romania/Bulgaria-Romanian/Bulgarian
locization
CB532-67944
Latin America AC8 - Argentina-Spanish CB532-67945
ABM - Latin Amer - (120v) Spanish localization CB532-67946
AC4 - Brazil-Portuguese CB532-67947
AKV - South America-Spanish CB532-67948
North America ABA - U. S.-English CB532-67949
A2L - Canada-FR/EN CB532-67951
Table 7-1 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB532A (continued)
ENWW Whole unit replacement 251
Table 7-2 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB533A
Country/region Localized configuration Replacement part number
Asia Pacific AB0 - Taiwan-Traditional Chinese CB533-67901
AB1 - Korea-Korean localization CB533-67902
AB2 - China-Simplified Chinese CB533-67903
AB3 - Thailand-Thai CB533-67904
AB4 - Singapore-English CB533-67905
BFV - Hong Kong SAR-English/Traditional Chinese CB533-67906
ABG - Australia-English CB533-67907
A2K - Philippines-English CB533-67908
ACJ - India-English CB533-67909
AK3 - Indonesia - Indonesia localizaton CB533-67910
AR7 - New Zealand-English CB533-67911
UUD - Vietnam-Vietnamese localization CB533-67912
ARR - Asia Pacific (Euro Cord)-English CB533-67913
ARS - Asia Pacific (UK Cord)-English CB533-67914
252 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Country/region Localized configuration Replacement part number
Europe, Middle East, and Africa ABD - Germany-German CB533-67916
ABF - France-French CB533-67917
ABH - Netherlands-Dutch CB533-67918
ABZ - Italy-Italian CB533-67919
ABE - Spain - Spanish localization CB533-67920
BFY - Spain-Catalan localization CB533-67921
ABU - United Kingdom-English CB533-67922
B14 - Belgium-Dutch/French CB533-67923
AR8 - Switzerland-French/German CB533-67924
BB1 - Norway/Finland/Sweden-NO/FI/SV
localization
CB533-67925
ABY - Denmark-Danish CB533-67926
ACB - Russia-Cyrillic CB533-67927
BCM - Czech Rep/Slovakia - Czech/Slovak
localization
CB533-67928
AKC - Hungary - Hungarian localization CB533-67929
AKD - Poland - Polish localization CB533-67930
AB9 - Portugal - Portuguese localization CB533-67931
ACQ - South Africa-English CB533-67932
BCP - Greece/Israel - Greek/Hebrew localization CB533-67933
BFQ - Mid East 220V-AR/FR/EN localization CB533-67934
BFR - Estonia/Lithuania/Latvia-ET/LT/LV CB533-67935
BFS - Slovenia/Croatia/Serbia-SL/HR/SR CB533-67936
BFZ - Kazakhstan/Ukraine-Kazakh/Ukrainian
locization
CB533-67937
AB8 - Turkey - Turkish localization CB533-67938
BG1 - Romania/Bulgaria-Romanian/Bulgarian
locization
CB533-67939
Latin America AC8 - Argentina-Spanish CB533-67940
ABM - Latin Amer - (120v) Spanish localization CB533-67941
AC4 - Brazil-Portuguese CB533-67942
AKV - South America-Spanish CB533-67943
North America ABA - U. S.-English CB533-67944
A2L - Canada-FR/EN CB533-67946
Table 7-2 Whole unit replacement, product bundle CB533A (continued)
ENWW Whole unit replacement 253
Scanner/ADF replacement parts
Item Part number
PKG FGI ASSY HP LaserJet M2727 SSA (scanner assembly) CB532-67905
PKG FGI ASSY HP LaserJet M2727 ADF (ADF assembly) CB532-67903
HP LaserJet M2727 ADF cover replacement kit Q6500-67901
ADF flag replacement kit Q3948-67902
HP LaserJet M2727 input tray assembly Q6500-60119
Clean out ADF C7309-40153
ADF pick roller assembly 5851-2559
ADF separation pad Q2665-60125
ADF assembly hinge replacement kit Q3948-67905
HP LaserJet M2727 ADF window replacement kit Q6500-67904
254 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Control-panel bezels
Table 7-3 Control-panel bezels
Item Language Part number
Control-panel bezel English (EN) CB532-40009
Control-panel bezel French (FR) CB532-40013
Control-panel bezel German (DE) CB532-40012
Control-panel bezel German (unpainted) (DE) CB532-40036
Control-panel bezel Italian (IT) CB532-40015
Control-panel bezel Spanish (ES) CB532-40010
Control-panel bezel Danish (DA) CB532-40019
Control-panel bezel Dutch (NL) CB532-40014
Control-panel bezel Finnish (FI) CB532-40018
Control-panel bezel Norwegian (NO) CB532-40017
Control-panel bezel Portuguese (PT) CB532-40011
Control-panel bezel Swedish (SV) CB532-40016
Control-panel bezel Czech (CS) CB532-40021
Control-panel bezel Hungarian (HU) CB532-40022
Control-panel bezel Polish (PL) CB532-40023
Control-panel bezel Russian (RU) CB532-40020
Control-panel bezel Slovak (SK) CB532-40024
Control-panel bezel Turkish (TR) CB532-40025
Control-panel bezel Arabic (AR) CB532-40028
Control-panel bezel Greek (EL) CB532-40026
Control-panel bezel Hebrew (HE) CB532-40027
Control-panel bezel Korean (KO) CB532-40030
Control-panel bezel Simplified Chinese (ZHCN) CB532-40031
Control-panel bezel Traditional Chinese (ZHTW) CB532-40029
Control-panel bezel Thai (TH) CB532-40032
Control-panel bezel Vietnamese (VI) CB532-40033
Control-panel bezel Catalan (CA) CB532-40037
Control-panel bezel Romanian (RO) CB532-40038
Control-panel bezel Croation (HR) CB532-40039
Control-panel bezel Slovenian (SL) CB532-40040
Control-panel bezel Indonesian (ID) CB532-40041
Control-panel bezel Kazakh (KK) CB532-40042
ENWW Control-panel bezels 255
Item Language Part number
Control-panel bezel Bulgarian (BG) CB532-40043
Control-panel bezel Ukranian (UK) CB532-40044
Control-panel bezel Serbian (SR) CB532-40045
Control-panel bezel Lithuanian (LT) CB532-40046
Control-panel bezel Estonia (ET) CB532-400473
Control-panel bezel Latvian (LV) CB532-40048
Table 7-3 Control-panel bezels (continued)
256 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Supplementary documentation and support
Table 7-4 Service and training support
Item Part number
Service manual (this manual) CB532-90946
A printed copy of the user guide is available in the following languages.
Table 7-5 User guides
Language Part number
English CB532-90901
Chinese, simplified CB532-90908
Czech CB532-90910
Dutch CB532-90912
French CB532-90902
German CB532-90903
Hungarian CB532-90916
Italian CB532-90904
Korean CB532-90919
Polish CB532-90923
Portuguese, Brazil CB532-90924
Russian CB532-90926
Spanish, Mid Atlantic CB532-90905
Swedish CB532-90930
Thai CB532-90931
Traditional Chinese CB532-90932
Turkish CB532-90933
Catalan CB532-90906
Bulgarian CB532-90907
Croatian CB532-90909
Danish CB532-90911
Estonian CB532-90913
Finnish CB532-90914
Greek CB532-90915
Bahasa Indonesian CB532-90917
Kazakh CB532-90918
Latvian CB532-90920
ENWW Supplementary documentation and support 257
Language Part number
Lituanian CB532-90921
Norwegian CB532-90922
Romanian CB532-90925
Serbian CB532-90927
Slovak CB532-90928
Slovenian CB532-90929
Ukranian CB532-90934
Vietnamese CB532-90935
Arabic CB532-90936
Hebrew CB532-90937
A printed copy of the Getting Started Guide is available in the following languages.
Table 7-6 Getting started guide
Language Part number
English, Spanish, Portuguese, French CB532–90938
English, Spanish, Portuguese, Catalan, Dutch, French,
German, Italian
CB532-90939
English, Danish, Finnish, French, Norwegian, Swedish, Arabic CB532-90940
English, Bulgarian, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian,
Russian, Slovak
CB532-90941
English, Kazakh, Turkish, Ukrainian, Estonian, Latvian,
Lithuanian
CB532-90942
English, Croation, Greek, Serbian, Slovenian, Hebrew CB532-90943
English, Korean, Indonesian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Thai, Vietnamese
CB532-90944
Table 7-7 Technical support Web sites
HP Customer Care Online
Software drivers, support documentation, and answers to
frequently asked questions
www.hp.com/support/LJM2727
HP Technical Training (North America)
Classes and schedules
www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Table 7-5 User guides (continued)
258 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Problem-solve diagrams
●Repetitive image defects
●Interface connectors
●Formatter connectors
●Fax card
●Solenoids
●Switches and sensors
●Rollers and pads
●PCAs (base unit)
●Major components (base unit)
●Scanner and ADF
●Circuit diagram (1 of 2)
●Circuit diagram (2 of 2)
Repetitive image defects
If the product output has a consistent, repetitive defect, then use Table 7-8 Repetitive image defects
on page 259 to determine which part needs to be replaced based on the measured distance between
the repetitions of the defect.
NOTE: The following table replaces the graphical repetitive defect ruler. You can make your own ruler
by using these measurements.
Table 7-8 Repetitive image defects
Distance between identical
defects
Dirty or damaged roller Solution
37.7 mm (1.48 inches) Primary charging roller Replace the print cartridge.
43.0 mm (1.69 inches) Registration roller Replace the registration assembly (see Registration-roller
assembly on page 161).
44.0 mm (1.73 inches) Developing cylinder Replace the print cartridge.
46.2 mm (1.82 inches) Transfer roller Replace the transfer roller.
56.5 mm (2.22 inches) Fuser film Replace the fuser (see Fuser on page 147).
69.0 mm (2.72 inches) Pressure roller Replace the fuser (see Fuser on page 147).
75.4 mm (2.97 inches) Photosensitive drum Replace the print cartridge.
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 259
Interface connectors
Figure 7-1 Interface connectors
23
1
Table 7-9 Interface connectors
1Hi-speed USB 2.0 port
2Network port
3Fax ports
Formatter connectors
Figure 7-2 Formatter connectors
J36 J2 J4
J35 J28
P108
P110
J7
J32 J34
J31
J33
P104
P109
J26
J15
J22
H3
J27
Table 7-10 Formatter connectors
Item Description
H3 Asian character control panel display PCA
NOTE: This PCA is only installed on products that use the Asian fax control panel display. Not all products will
have this PCA installed.
J2 Flatbed motor
260 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Item Description
J4 Scanner
J7 Dimm slot
J15 Network port
J22 High-speed USB 2.0 port
J26 Fax card PCA
J27 Control panel
J28 Laser video
J31 ECU PCA
J32 Speaker
J33 +3.3V (from the engine)
J34 Tray 1 solenoid (MP tray)
J35 Memory tag (E-label)
J36 ADF motor
P104 BDM
P108 Serial
P109 SPI module
P110 Ansible trace monitor
Fax card
Figure 7-3 Fax card connectors
J2
J9
Table 7-11 Fax card
Item Description
J2 Formatter
J9 Fax ports
Table 7-10 Formatter connectors (continued)
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 261
Solenoids
Figure 7-4 Solenoids
1
3
2
Table 7-12 Solenoids
Item Description
1Duplex solenoid
2Tray 1 pickup solenoid
3Tray 2 pickup solenoid
262 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Switches and sensors
Figure 7-5 Switches and sensors
1
1
3
2
Table 7-13 Switches and sensors
Item Description
1Interlock switch
2Delivery sensor
3Top-of-page sensor
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 263
Rollers and pads
Figure 7-6 Rollers and pads
1
3
2
4
Table 7-14 Rollers and pads
Item Description
1Transfer roller
2Pressure roller
3Pickup roller
4Separation pad
264 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
PCAs (base unit)
Figure 7-7 PCAs (base unit)
1
2
Table 7-15 PCAs (base unit)
Item Description
1Engine-controller assembly (ECU)
2Power-switch PCA
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 265
Major components (base unit)
Figure 7-8 Major components (base unit)
1
3
2
4
55
6
Table 7-16 Major components (base unit)
Item Description
1Duplex-drive gears
2Main-drive assembly
3Duplex-drive assembly
4Engine-controller assembly (ECU)
5Tray 2 cassette
6Fuser
266 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Scanner and ADF
Figure 7-9 Scanner and ADF
2
1
Table 7-17 Scanner and ADF
Item Description
1Scanner
2ADF
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 267
Circuit diagram (1 of 2)
Figure 7-10 Circuit diagram (1 of 2)
Formatter PCA
J34
1
J4
J2
Scanner sub-assembly (SSA)
Flatbed
motor
12345
AC inverter
PCA
Scanner PCB
CCD sensor
(soldered to PCB)
J1
J2
FFC
cable
Front panel
7
8
9
10
11 4
56 12
3
ADF
ADF motor
Paper
sensors
12345
ADF cover
ADF detect
ADF paper 1
ADF paper 2
FAX
DIMM
LAN
CCD scanner assembly
Laser/scanner
motor
LCD and Key switch/LED PCA
P2
FFC
to
ECU
J26
J36
J27
J28
J26
J35
J32 J15 J22 USB
J33
J7
Laser/video
unit
CCFL LED
+24V
J31
H3
PCA Asian
Character
Dispaly
268 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Circuit diagram (2 of 2)
Figure 7-11 Circuit diagram (2 of 2)
Fuser
Engine controller PCA
HP LJ 272 7nfs
Paper feeder
driver PCA
FFC to formatter
ENWW Problem-solve diagrams 269
Parts lists and diagrams
How to use the parts lists and diagrams
The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A
parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not
a field replaceable unit (FRU).
CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components,
pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column to ensure that the part number
selected is for the correct product model.
NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit board assembly.” Components
described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as
cables and sensors.
270 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Types of screws
Illustration Description Size Part number Use
Screw, RS M3X6
M3X6
M3X8
XA9-1495-000CN
XA9-1561-000CN
XA9-1504-000CN
Used to secure metal to
metal
Screw w/washer M3X8
M4X12
XA9-1420-000CN
XA9-1492-000CN
Used to secure metal
components to metal
components (for example,
a ground wire to the
frame)
Screw, tapping M3X6 XB9-1503-000CN Used to secure anything
to plastic
Screw, tapping, truss
head
M4X10 XB4-7401-005CN Used to secure anything
to plastic
Screw, tapping binding,
head
M3X8 XB4-7300-809CN Used to secure anything
to plastic
Screw, toothed washer M4X6 XB2-7400-606CN Used to secure metal
components to metal
components
Screw, TP M3X8 XA-1648-000CN Used to secure anything
to plastic
12 mm
12 mm
ENWW Parts lists and diagrams 271
Scanner and ADF assemblies
Figure 7-12 Scanner and ADF assemblies
272 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-18 Scanner and ADF assemblies
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 ADF PKG FGI ASSY (automatic document feeder) CB532-67903 1
2 Input tray assembly HP LaserJet M2727 Q6500-60119 1
3 ADF hinge replacement kit Q3948-67905 1
4 SSA PKG FGI ASSY (scanner flatbed assembly) CB532-67905 1
ENWW Scanner and ADF assemblies 273
Scanner components
Figure 7-13 Scanner assemblies
274 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-19 Scanner components
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 ADF window replacement kit Q6500-67904 1
2 Bezel, control panel See Control-panel bezels
on page 255.
1
3 Control panel, Western fax CB532-60101 1
3 Control panel, Asian fax CB532-60102 1
NOTE: The Asian character control panel display PCA (see Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and
nameplate on page 280) must be installed on the formatter to support the Asian fax control panel
(CB532-60102).
ENWW Scanner components 275
ADF components
Figure 7-14 ADF components
276 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-20 ADF components
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 ADF cover replacement kit Q6500-67901 1
2 ADF cleanout part C7309-40153 1
3 ADF flag replacement kit Q3948-67902 1
4 ADF pickup roller assembly 5851-2559 1
5 ADF separation pad Q2665-60125 1
ENWW ADF components 277
Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs
only)
Figure 7-15 Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
278 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-21 Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Convenience stapler mechanism HP LaserJet M2727nfs
(replacement)
CB532-60105 1
2 Convenience stapler AC inlet cable HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q6501-60101 1
3 Convenience stapler cover door HP LaserJet M2727nfs RC1-7523-000CN 1
4 Convenience stapler power supply HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q7429-60501 1
5 Convenience stapler power supply bracket and strap HP
LaserJet M2727nfs
CB532-67902 1
6 Convenience stapler cassette (2-pack) HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q7432-67001 1
NOTE: The convenience stapler components are used in the HP LJ3392 and the HP LaserJet
M2727nfs.
ENWW Convenience stapler components (HP LaserJet M2727nfs only) 279
Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate
Figure 7-16 Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate
5
6
280 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-22 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Formatter PCA CC370-60001 1
2 Fax card/Formatter FFC CB534-60117 1
3 Fax card US/AP ROHS CC502-60001 1
3 Fax card EMEA ROHS CC369-60001 1
4 Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nf CB532-00009 1
4 Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nfs CB532-00003 1
5 Jewel, HP 7121-8285 1
6 PCA, Asian character display control panel (with spacer) CB532-67904 1
NOTE: The Asian character display control panel PCA (CB532-67904) is only installed on products
that use the Asian fax control panel.
ENWW Formatter, fax card, HP jewel, and nameplate 281
External covers and panels
Figure 7-17 External covers and panels
See Cartridge
door assembly
1
6
5
4
3
2
7
282 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-23 External covers and panels
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Rear cover assembly RM1-4270-000CN 1
2 Cover right (with dummy stapler cover) RM1-4708-000CN 1
3 Cover top RC2-2940-000CN 1
4 Label, stapler prohibition RC1-3794-000CN 1
5 Cover front RC2-0330-000CN 1
6 Cover left (with DIMM door) RC1-4707-000CN 1
7 Cover dummy (stapler plug; HP LaserJet M2727nf) RC1-7523-000CN 1
ENWW External covers and panels 283
Cartridge door assembly
Figure 7-18 Cartridge door assembly
21
284 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-24 Cartridge door assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
All Cartridge door assembly RM1-4711-000CN 1
1 Inner cover RM1-4712-000CN 1
2 Screw, tapping truss XB4-7401-000CN 2
ENWW Cartridge door assembly 285
Internal components (1 of 4)
Figure 7-19 Internal components (1 of 4)
2
1
29
30
30 4
3
7
21
22
21
23
20 19 18
11
13 14
15
17
16
26
6
4
27
28
4
34
44
4
29
A
A
(PS916)
(J208)
(J5)
See Fuser assembly
See Duplexing-drive assembly
See Main-drive
assembly
286 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-25 Internal components (1 of 4)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Paper-retaining assembly RM1-4265-000CN 1
2 Roller, face down RL1-0527-000CN 1
3 Paper-feed guide assembly RM1-4263-000CN 1
4 Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN 12
6 Guide, DC cable 2 RC2-1569-000CN 1
7 Paper-pickup gear assembly RM1-1301-000CN 1
11 MP separation pad (Tray 1) RL1-1524-000CN 1
13 Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 XB4-7401-000CN 1
15 Screw, tapping binding head M3X8 XB4-7300-000CN 1
16 Separation pad base RC2-0419-000CN 1
17 Spring, compression RU5-2894-000CN 1
18 Paper-pickup drive shaft RC1-3471-000CN 1
19 Flag, paper sensing RC1-3472-000CN 1
20 Right bushing RB2-2895-000CN 1
21 Roller, paper-pickup idler RC1-3470-000CN 2
22 Roller, paper pickup RL1-0540-000CN 1
23 Left bushing RB2-2896-000CN 1
26 Spring, compression RU5-2323-000CN 2
27 Gear, 29T RU5-0331-000CN 1
28 Gear, 19T RU5-0332-000CN 1
29 Screw, tap M3X6 XA9-1503-000CN 5
30 Bushing RC1-3665-000CN 2
34 Speaker assembly RM1-4943-000CN 1
ENWW Internal components (1 of 4) 287
Internal components (2 of 4)
Figure 7-20 Internal components (2 of 4)
1
33
22
8
12
38
3
1
1
1
7
1
1
25
27
26
7
77
7
7
13
21
10
11
7
31
A
A
(J3)
(J210)
(FM1)
(J209)
(J2)
(J802)
(J202)
(J1202) (M1)
(J2100)
(J1205)
(J1205)
(J211)
(SL3)
(SL1)
(J207)
(J801)
See Engine-controller
assembly (ECU)
See Duplexing assembly
288 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-26 Internal components (2 of 4)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN 8
2 Arm, cam RC2-0405-000CN 1
3 Arm, tag RC2-0392-000CN 1
7 Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN 9
8 Solenoid (SL3) RK2-0910-000CN 1
10 Holder, fan RC2-2946-000CN 1
11 Fan RK2-2082-000CN 1
12 Screw, TP M3X8 XA9-1648-000CN 4
13 Holder, drawer connector RC2-0396-000CN 1
22 Solenoid (SL1) RK2-0424-000CN 1
25 Guide, cartridge right lower RC2-0346-000CN 1
26 Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1561-000CN 1
27 Guide, cartridge right upper RC1-0426-000CN 1
31 Screw, tap M3X6 XA9-1503-000CN 3
33 Motor, DC RK2-1567-000CN 1
38 Scanner assembly (laser/scanner) RM1-4262-000CN 1
ENWW Internal components (2 of 4) 289
Internal components (3 of 4)
Figure 7-21 Internal components (3 of 4)
6
54
10
15
8
12
1
9
13
1
1
2
1
20
28
(PS912)
(PS913)
(J203)
(PS911)
290 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-27 Internal components (3 of 4)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 XB4-7401-005CN 7
2 Label, transfer guide open RC1-3796-000CN 1
4 Registration assembly RM1-4244-000CN 1
5 Label, clear jam RC2-2952-000CN 1
6 Label, fixing (fusing) pressure release RC1-2953-000CN 1
8 Shutter link assembly RM1-1321-000CN 1
9 Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN 1
10 Top-sensor assembly RM1-1283-000CN 1
12 Screw, w/washer M4X12 XA9-1422-000CN 1
13 Screw, tap binding head M3X8 XB4-7300-000CN 2
13 Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN 2
15 Paper-width sensor assembly RM1-4245-000CN 1
20 Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN 1
28 Roller, transfer RM1-4279-000CN 1
ENWW Internal components (3 of 4) 291
Internal components (4 of 4)
Figure 7-22 Internal components (4 of 4)
11
34
32
35
33
32
36
31
3
1
4
4
21
4
12
4
4
12
12 10
12
12
(SW301)
(SL2)
(J4)
(J1101)
12
43
(J1102)
42
(J101)
292 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-28 Internal components (4 of 4)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Guide, cartridge left upper RC2-0425-000CN 1
3 Guide, cartridge left lower RC2-0339-000CN 1
4 Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN 6
10 MP solenoid holder RC2-0334-000CN 1
11 Solenoid (SL2) RK2-1587-000CN 1
12 Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN 8
31 MP left cam RC2-0387-000CN 1
32 MP roller RC1-0950-000CN 2
33 MP paper-pickup roller holder RC2-0386-000CN 1
34 MP pickup roller RL1-1525-000CN 1
35 MP paper-pickup roller cover RC2-0420-000CN 1
36 MP right cam RC2-0388-000CN 1
42 Screw, toothed washer M4X6 XB2-7400-606CN 1
43 Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN 2
ENWW Internal components (4 of 4) 293
Engine-controller assembly (ECU)
Figure 7-23 Engine-controller assembly
(J7)
(J1)
2
1
3
2
2
2
294 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-29 Engine-controller assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Engine-controller PCA (110 to 127 v) RM1-4940-000CN 1
1 Engine-controller PCA (220 to 240 v) RM1-4941-000CN 1
2 Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN 4
3 Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN 1
ENWW Engine-controller assembly (ECU) 295
Main-drive assembly
Figure 7-24 Main-drive assembly
296 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-30 Main-drive assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
all Main-drive assembly RM1-4253-000CN 1
ENWW Main-drive assembly 297
Duplexing-drive assembly
Figure 7-25 Duplexing-drive assembly
1
2
298 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-31 Duplexing-drive assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
all Duplexing-drive assembly RM1-4255-000CN 1
1 Normal-rotation drive assembly RM1-4256-000CN 1
2 Reverse-rotation drive assembly RM1-4257-000CN 1
ENWW Duplexing-drive assembly 299
Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder
Figure 7-26 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder
300 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-32 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Cassette, tray 2 (250-sheet) RM1-4251-000CN 1
2 Cassette/feeder, tray 3 (250-sheet) Q7556-67901 1
Not shown Separation pad, tray 2 and optional tray 3 RM1-1292-000CN 1
NOTE: Paper trays are not serviceable. Replace the entire tray if needed.
ENWW Tray 2 cassette and tray 3 cassette/feeder 301
Duplexing assembly
Figure 7-27 Duplexing assembly
A15
1
302 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-33 Duplexing assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
all Duplexing assembly RM1-4258-000CN 1
1 Size-change assembly RM1-1318-000CN 1
ENWW Duplexing assembly 303
Fuser assembly
Figure 7-28 Fuser assembly
304 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Table 7-34 Fuser assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
all Fuser (110 to 127 v) RM1-4247-000CN 1
all Fuser (220 to 240 v) RM1-4248-000CN 1
ENWW Fuser assembly 305
Alphabetical parts list
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page
ADF cleanout part C7309-40153 ADF components on page 277
ADF cover replacement kit Q6500-67901 ADF components on page 277
ADF flag replacement kit Q3948-67902 ADF components on page 277
ADF hinge replacement kit Q3948-67905 Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
ADF pickup roller assembly 5851-2559 ADF components on page 277
ADF PKG FGI ASSY (automatic document feeder) CB532-67903 Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
ADF separation pad Q2665-60125 ADF components on page 277
ADF window replacement kit Q6500-67904 Scanner components
on page 275
Arm, cam RC2-0405-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Arm, tag RC2-0392-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Bezel, control panel See Control-panel bezels
on page 255.
Scanner components
on page 275
Bushing RC1-3665-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Cartridge door assembly RM1-4711-000CN Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
Cassette, tray 2 (250-sheet) RM1-4251-000CN Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
Cassette/feeder, tray 3 (250-sheet) Q7556-67901 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
Control panel, Asian fax CB532-60102 Scanner components
on page 275
Control panel, Western fax CB532-60101 Scanner components
on page 275
Convenience stapler AC inlet cable HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q6501-60101 Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Convenience stapler cassette (2-pack) HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q7432-67001 Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Convenience stapler cover door HP LaserJet M2727nfs RC1-7523-000CN Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Convenience stapler mechanism HP LaserJet M2727nfs
(replacement)
CB532-60105 Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
306 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Description Part number Table and page
Convenience stapler power supply bracket and strap HP LaserJet
M2727nfs
CB532-67902 Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Convenience stapler power supply HP LaserJet M2727nfs Q7429-60501 Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Cover dummy (stapler plug; HP LaserJet M2727nf) RC1-7523-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Cover front RC2-0330-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Cover left (with DIMM door) RC1-4707-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Cover right (with dummy stapler cover) RM1-4708-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Cover top RC2-2940-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Duplexing assembly RM1-4258-000CN Duplexing assembly
on page 303
Duplexing-drive assembly RM1-4255-000CN Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
Engine-controller PCA (110 to 127 v) RM1-4940-000CN Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
Engine-controller PCA (220 to 240 v) RM1-4941-000CN Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
Fan RK2-2082-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Fax card EMEA ROHS CC369-60001 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Fax card US/AP ROHS CC502-60001 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Fax card/Formatter FFC CB534-60117 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Flag, paper sensing RC1-3472-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Formatter PCA CC370-60001 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Fuser (110 to 127 v) RM1-4247-000CN Fuser assembly on page 305
Fuser (220 to 240 v) RM1-4248-000CN Fuser assembly on page 305
Gear, 19T RU5-0332-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Gear, 29T RU5-0331-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Guide, cartridge left lower RC2-0339-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 307
Description Part number Table and page
Guide, cartridge left upper RC2-0425-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Guide, cartridge right lower RC2-0346-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Guide, cartridge right upper RC1-0426-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Guide, DC cable 2 RC2-1569-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Holder, drawer connector RC2-0396-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Holder, fan RC2-2946-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Inner cover RM1-4712-000CN Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
Input tray assembly HP LaserJet M2727 Q6500-60119 Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
Jewel, HP 7121-8285 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Label, clear jam RC2-2952-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Label, fixing (fusing) pressure release RC1-2953-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Label, stapler prohibition RC1-3794-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Label, transfer guide open RC1-3796-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Left bushing RB2-2896-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Main-drive assembly RM1-4253-000CN Main-drive assembly
on page 297
Motor, DC RK2-1567-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
MP left cam RC2-0387-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
MP paper-pickup roller cover RC2-0420-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
MP paper-pickup roller holder RC2-0386-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
MP pickup roller RL1-1525-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
MP right cam RC2-0388-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
MP roller RC1-0950-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
308 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Description Part number Table and page
MP separation pad (Tray 1) RL1-1524-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
MP solenoid holder RC2-0334-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nf CB532-00009 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nfs CB532-00003 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Normal-rotation drive assembly RM1-4256-000CN Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
Paper-feed guide assembly RM1-4263-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Paper-pickup drive shaft RC1-3471-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Paper-pickup gear assembly RM1-1301-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Paper-retaining assembly RM1-4265-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Paper-width sensor assembly RM1-4245-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
PCA, Asian character display control panel (with spacer) CB532-67904 Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Rear cover assembly RM1-4270-000CN External covers and panels
on page 283
Registration assembly RM1-4244-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Reverse-rotation drive assembly RM1-4257-000CN Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
Right bushing RB2-2895-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Roller, face down RL1-0527-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Roller, paper pickup RL1-0540-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Roller, paper-pickup idler RC1-3470-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Roller, transfer RM1-4279-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Scanner assembly (laser/scanner) RM1-4262-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 309
Description Part number Table and page
Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Screw, RS M3X6 XA9-1495-000CN Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1561-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Screw, RS M3X8 XA9-1504-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Screw, tap binding head M3X8 XB4-7300-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Screw, tap M3X6 XA9-1503-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Screw, tap M3X6 XA9-1503-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Screw, tapping binding head M3X8 XB4-7300-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Screw, tapping truss XB4-7401-000CN Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 XB4-7401-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 XB4-7401-005CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Screw, toothed washer M4X6 XB2-7400-606CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Screw, TP M3X8 XA9-1648-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Screw, w/washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
Screw, w/washer M4X12 XA9-1422-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Separation pad base RC2-0419-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Separation pad, tray 2 and optional tray 3 RM1-1292-000CN Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
310 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Description Part number Table and page
Shutter link assembly RM1-1321-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Size-change assembly RM1-1318-000CN Duplexing assembly
on page 303
Solenoid (SL1) RK2-0424-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Solenoid (SL2) RK2-1587-000CN Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Solenoid (SL3) RK2-0910-000CN Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
Speaker assembly RM1-4943-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Spring, compression RU5-2894-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Spring, compression RU5-2323-000CN Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
SSA PKG FGI ASSY (scanner flatbed assembly) CB532-67905 Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
Top-sensor assembly RM1-1283-000CN Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Table 7-35 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 311
Numerical parts list
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page
5851-2559 ADF pickup roller assembly ADF components on page 277
7121-8285 Jewel, HP Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
C7309-40153 ADF cleanout part ADF components on page 277
CB532-00003 Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nfs Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CB532-00009 Nameplate HP LaserJet M2727nf Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CB532-60101 Control panel, Western fax Scanner components
on page 275
CB532-60102 Control panel, Asian fax Scanner components
on page 275
CB532-60105 Convenience stapler mechanism HP LaserJet M2727nfs
(replacement)
Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
CB532-67902 Convenience stapler power supply bracket and strap HP LaserJet
M2727nfs
Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
CB532-67903 ADF PKG FGI ASSY (automatic document feeder) Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
CB532-67904 PCA, Asian character display control panel (with spacer) Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CB532-67905 SSA PKG FGI ASSY (scanner flatbed assembly) Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
CB534-60117 Fax card/Formatter FFC Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CC369-60001 Fax card EMEA ROHS Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CC370-60001 Formatter PCA Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
CC502-60001 Fax card US/AP ROHS Formatter, Fax card, HP jewel,
and nameplate on page 281
Q2665-60125 ADF separation pad ADF components on page 277
Q3948-67902 ADF flag replacement kit ADF components on page 277
Q3948-67905 ADF hinge replacement kit Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
Q6500-60119 Input tray assembly HP LaserJet M2727 Scanner and ADF assemblies
on page 273
Q6500-67901 ADF cover replacement kit ADF components on page 277
Q6500-67904 ADF window replacement kit Scanner components
on page 275
312 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Part number Description Table and page
Q6501-60101 Convenience stapler AC inlet cable HP LaserJet M2727nfs Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Q7429-60501 Convenience stapler power supply HP LaserJet M2727nfs Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Q7432-67001 Convenience stapler cassette (2-pack) HP LaserJet M2727nfs Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
Q7556-67901 Cassette/feeder, tray 3 (250-sheet) Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
RB2-2895-000CN Right bushing Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RB2-2896-000CN Left bushing Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC1-0426-000CN Guide, cartridge right upper Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC1-0950-000CN MP roller Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC1-2953-000CN Label, fixing (fusing) pressure release Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RC1-3470-000CN Roller, paper-pickup idler Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC1-3471-000CN Paper-pickup drive shaft Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC1-3472-000CN Flag, paper sensing Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC1-3665-000CN Bushing Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC1-3794-000CN Label, stapler prohibition External covers and panels
on page 283
RC1-3796-000CN Label, transfer guide open Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RC1-4707-000CN Cover left (with DIMM door) External covers and panels
on page 283
RC1-7523-000CN Convenience stapler cover door HP LaserJet M2727nfs Convenience stapler
components (HP LaserJet
M2727nfs only) on page 279
RC1-7523-000CN Cover dummy (stapler plug; HP LaserJet M2727nf) External covers and panels
on page 283
RC2-0330-000CN Cover front External covers and panels
on page 283
RC2-0334-000CN MP solenoid holder Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-0339-000CN Guide, cartridge left lower Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list (continued)
ENWW Numerical parts list 313
Part number Description Table and page
RC2-0346-000CN Guide, cartridge right lower Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC2-0386-000CN MP paper-pickup roller holder Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-0387-000CN MP left cam Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-0388-000CN MP right cam Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-0392-000CN Arm, tag Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC2-0396-000CN Holder, drawer connector Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC2-0405-000CN Arm, cam Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC2-0419-000CN Separation pad base Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC2-0420-000CN MP paper-pickup roller cover Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-0425-000CN Guide, cartridge left upper Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RC2-1569-000CN Guide, DC cable 2 Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RC2-2940-000CN Cover top External covers and panels
on page 283
RC2-2946-000CN Holder, fan Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RC2-2952-000CN Label, clear jam Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RK2-0424-000CN Solenoid (SL1) Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RK2-0910-000CN Solenoid (SL3) Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RK2-1567-000CN Motor, DC Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RK2-1587-000CN Solenoid (SL2) Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RK2-2082-000CN Fan Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RL1-0527-000CN Roller, face down Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RL1-0540-000CN Roller, paper pickup Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RL1-1524-000CN MP separation pad (Tray 1) Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list (continued)
314 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Part number Description Table and page
RL1-1525-000CN MP pickup roller Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
RM1-1283-000CN Top-sensor assembly Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RM1-1292-000CN Separation pad, tray 2 and optional tray 3 Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
RM1-1301-000CN Paper-pickup gear assembly Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RM1-1318-000CN Size-change assembly Duplexing assembly
on page 303
RM1-1321-000CN Shutter link assembly Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RM1-4244-000CN Registration assembly Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RM1-4245-000CN Paper-width sensor assembly Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RM1-4247-000CN Fuser (110 to 127 v) Fuser assembly on page 305
RM1-4248-000CN Fuser (220 to 240 v) Fuser assembly on page 305
RM1-4251-000CN Cassette, tray 2 (250-sheet) Tray 2 cassette and tray 3
cassette/feeder on page 301
RM1-4253-000CN Main-drive assembly Main-drive assembly
on page 297
RM1-4255-000CN Duplexing-drive assembly Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
RM1-4256-000CN Normal-rotation drive assembly Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
RM1-4257-000CN Reverse-rotation drive assembly Duplexing-drive assembly
on page 299
RM1-4258-000CN Duplexing assembly Duplexing assembly
on page 303
RM1-4262-000CN Scanner assembly (laser/scanner) Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
RM1-4263-000CN Paper-feed guide assembly Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RM1-4265-000CN Paper-retaining assembly Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RM1-4270-000CN Rear cover assembly External covers and panels
on page 283
RM1-4279-000CN Roller, transfer Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
RM1-4708-000CN Cover right (with dummy stapler cover) External covers and panels
on page 283
RM1-4711-000CN Cartridge door assembly Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list (continued)
ENWW Numerical parts list 315
Part number Description Table and page
RM1-4712-000CN Inner cover Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
RM1-4940-000CN Engine-controller PCA (110 to 127 v) Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
RM1-4941-000CN Engine-controller PCA (220 to 240 v) Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
RM1-4943-000CN Speaker assembly Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RU5-0331-000CN Gear, 29T Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RU5-0332-000CN Gear, 19T Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RU5-2323-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
RU5-2894-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
See Control-panel bezels
on page 255.
Bezel, control panel Scanner components
on page 275
XA9-1420-000CN Screw, w/washer M3X8 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
XA9-1420-000CN Screw, w/washer M3X8 Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
XA9-1420-000CN Screw, w/washer M3X8 Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
XA9-1422-000CN Screw, w/washer M4X12 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
XA9-1495-000CN Screw, RS M3X6 Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
XA9-1495-000CN Screw, RS M3X6 Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
XA9-1495-000CN Screw, RS M3X6 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
XA9-1495-000CN Screw, RS M3X6 Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
XA9-1495-000CN Screw, RS M3X6 Engine-controller assembly
on page 295
XA9-1503-000CN Screw, tap M3X6 Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
XA9-1503-000CN Screw, tap M3X6 Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
XA9-1504-000CN Screw, RS M3X8 Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
XA9-1504-000CN Screw, RS M3X8 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list (continued)
316 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
Part number Description Table and page
XA9-1504-000CN Screw, RS M3X8 Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
XA9-1561-000CN Screw, RS M3X8 Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
XA9-1648-000CN Screw, TP M3X8 Internal components (2 of 4)
on page 289
XB2-7400-606CN Screw, toothed washer M4X6 Internal components (4 of 4)
on page 293
XB4-7300-000CN Screw, tapping binding head M3X8 Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
XB4-7300-000CN Screw, tap binding head M3X8 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
XB4-7401-000CN Screw, tapping truss Cartridge door assembly
on page 285
XB4-7401-000CN Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 Internal components (1 of 4)
on page 287
XB4-7401-005CN Screw, tapping truss head M4X10 Internal components (3 of 4)
on page 291
Table 7-36 Numerical parts list (continued)
ENWW Numerical parts list 317
318 Chapter 7 Parts ENWW
A Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
HP LaserJet M2727nf and M2727nfs One-year limited warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,
for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute
its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or
provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from
country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/
region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The
level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function
of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory
reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 319
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
320 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
Print cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the device product or (c) exhibit wear
from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement 321
322 Appendix A Service and support ENWW
B Specifications
This section contains the following information about the product:
●Physical specifications
●Electrical specifications
●Power consumption
●Environmental specifications
●Acoustic emissions
ENWW 323
Physical specifications
Table B-1 Physical specifications
Product Height Depth Width Weight
HP LaserJet M2727nf 690 mm (27.2 inches) 650 mm (25.6 inches) 500 mm (19.7 inches) 17.2 kg (37.8 lb)
HP LaserJet M2727nfs 780 mm (30.7 inches) 650 mm (25.6 inches) 500 mm (19.7 inches) 20.5 kg (44.9 lb)
Electrical specifications
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
Table B-2 Electrical specifications
Item 110-volt models 230-volt models
Power requirements 110 to 127 V (+/- 10%)
50 / 60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
220 to 240 V (+/- 10%)
50 / 60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
Rated current 4.9 A 2.9 A
Power consumption
Table B-3 Power consumption (average, in watts)
1,
5
Product model Printing
2
Copying
2
Ready/Sleep
3
,
4
Off
2
HP LaserJet M2727nf 410 W 410 W 13 W <0.1 W
HP LaserJet M2727nfs 410 W 410 W 13 W <0.1 W
1Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 for current information.
2Power reported is highest values measured using all standard voltages.
3Instant on fuser technology.
4Recovery time from Ready/Sleep to start of printing = 8.5 seconds.
5Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode = 45 BTU/hour
324 Appendix B Specifications ENWW
Environmental specifications
Table B-4 Environmental specifications
1
Recommended Operating Storage
Temperature 15° to 32.5° C
(59° to 90.5° F)
15° to 32.5° C
(59° to 90.5° F)
-20° to 40° C
(-4° to 104° F)
Relative humidity 10% to 80% 10% to 80% 95% or less
1Values are subject to change.
Acoustic emissions
Table B-5 Acoustic emissions
2
Sound Power Level Declared per ISO 9296
1
Printing (26 ppm) LWAd = 6.4 Bels (A) [64 dB (A)]
Ready Inaudible
Sound Pressure Level - Bystander Position Declared per ISO 9296
1
Printing (26 ppm) LpAm = 50 dB(A)
Ready Inaudible
1Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/LJM2727 for current information.
2Configuration tested: HP LaserJet M2727nf printing simplex using A4 paper at 26 ppm.
ENWW Environmental specifications 325
326 Appendix B Specifications ENWW
C Regulatory information
This section contains the following regulatory information:
●FCC compliance
●Environmental product stewardship program
●Telephone Consumer Protection Act (United States)
●IC CS-03 requirements
●EU statement for telecom operation
●New Zealand telecom statements
●Declaration of conformity
●Safety statements
ENWW 327
FCC compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-
Packard could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of the FCC
rules.
This equipment complies with FCC rules, Part 68. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. The REN is used
to determine the quantity of devices that might be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on
the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not
all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that might be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company
to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack
that is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service.
Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service
may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe
it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain
uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in the front
of this manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the
problem is resolved. The following repairs can be done by the customer: Replace any original equipment
that came with the device. This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power
cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the
AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
328 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves
money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®
qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified
products are also listed at:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This device’s manual/automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages
printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural
resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print
cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return
multiple cartridges together rather than separately.
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons
of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be
returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this
label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/
recycle.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 329
Return and recycling instructions
United States and Puerto Rico
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges)
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.
2. Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs).
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
OR
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/
recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges).
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
Single returns
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.
Shipping
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the
package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information,
or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call
1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to
change without notice.
Non-US returns
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit
http://www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet
printing supplies.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper
according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
330 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
HP LaserJet M2727
Type Carbon monofluoride lithium
Weight 0.8 g
Location On formatter board
User-removable No
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where
you purchased the product.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)
can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/
globalcitizenship/environment.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 331
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●HP’s commitment to the environment
●HP’s environmental management system
●HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/index.html.
332 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (United States)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer
or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual
sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity,
or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which
charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
IC CS-03 requirements
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing
this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment
should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made
by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection
that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural
areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) of this device is 0.7.
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication
of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination
on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum
of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). The standard connecting
arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network
is CA11A.
ENWW Telephone Consumer Protection Act (United States) 333
EU statement for telecom operation
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks
(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R&TTE
Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking. For more details, see
Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual. However, due
to differences between individual national PSTNs, the product may not guarantee unconditional
assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on
the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please
follow the instructions provided in the user manual. If you experience network compatibility issues,
please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-Packard help desk in the country/region of operation.
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the
local PSTN operator.
New Zealand telecom statements
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted
that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement
of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance
that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different
make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the
same line.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.
This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for
New Zealand.
334 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company DoC#: BOISB-0602-01-rel.1.0
Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name: HP LaserJet M2727 nf and M2727nfs
Regulatory Model Number2) BOISB-0602-01
Including: Q7556A—Optional 250-Sheet Input Tray
Product Options: ALL
Print Cartridges: Q7553A / Q7553X
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC: CISPR22:2005 / EN55022:2006 – Class B1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B1) / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
TELECOM: ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 683)
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II), and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name
or the product number(s).
3) Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed above.
Boise, Idaho , USA
July 2007
For regulatory topics only:
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe,, Herrenberger Strasse 140, , D-71034, Böblingen, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, , (Phone:
208-396-6000)
ENWW Declaration of conformity 335
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
EMI statement (Korea)
336 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet M2727nf, M2727nfs, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet M2727nf, M2727nfs - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita.
Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän
käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman
erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.
ENWW Safety statements 337
Substances table (China)
338 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
250–sheet tray. See tray 2 or tray 3
A
ac inlet cable
removing 126
stapler, removing 126
accessibility features 4
accessories, part numbers 248
acoustic emissions 325
activity log, fax
printing 239
troubleshooting 226
ADF
assembly, removing 115
cleaning pickup-roller
assembly 55
components 276
detection operations 75
diagrams 267
functions 73
install input tray 23
jam detection 75
jams 180
load originals 26
locating 5
operations 73
page sizes supported 222
paper path 74
part numbers 254, 272
pickup-roller assembly,
replacing 110
removing scanner
assembly 117
scanner assembly,
removing 117
scanner glass, removing 113
sensors 74
trailing edge detection 75
troubleshooting 229
ADF jam detection
document-feeder jam 75
long-document jam 75
stall jam 75
trailing edge detection 75
ADF paper path 74
ADF pickup-roller assembly
replacing 110
ADF scanner glass
removing 113
ADF sensors 74
after service checklist 96
alert messages 169
Alerts tab
HP ToolboxFX 59
answering machines,
troubleshooting 224
Apple Macintosh. See Macintosh
archive print setting 236, 242
assembly
ADF, removing 115
duplex, removing 135
duplexing, part numbers 302
duplexing-drive, part
numbers 298
engine controller,
removing 153
engine-controller 294
fuser, part numbers 304
interlock, removing 152
laser/scanner, removing 137
main gear, removing 162
main-drive 296
memory-tag-reader,
removing 139
pick-up roller, replacing 110
pickup-and-feed,
removing 160
pickup-roller, removing 110
registration-roller,
removing 161
scanner/ADF, removing 117
stapler, removing 122
automatic document feeder (ADF)
jams 180
locating 5
B
background, gray 207
bands, troubleshooting 206
batteries included 330
battery specifications 36
bezels, control panel
part numbers 255
removing 119
billing (metering) tone filters 91
billing code report, fax 240
billing filters
fax 91
bins, output
jams, clearing 186
locating 5
blank copies,
troubleshooting 217
blank scans, troubleshooting 213
box, unpacking 22
C
cables
flat flexible cables (FFCs) 137
part numbers 248
stapler, removing 126
call report, fax
printing 239
troubleshooting 226
Canadian DOC regulations 336
cartridge. See print cartridge
cartridge door components, part
numbers 284
ENWW Index 339
cartridge-door release, locating 5
cartridges
alerts 59
drum rotation test 230
high-voltage contacts 233
HP fraud hotline 48
non-HP 48
part numbers 248
recycle 35
recycling 329
status page, printing 237
warranty 321
characters, troubleshooting 208
checklist
print-quality 205
checklists
after service 96
before service 95
preservice 95
troubleshooting 166
checks
drum rotation 230
engine 231
half-self-test 232
heating element 233
high-voltage power
supply 233
circuit diagram (1 of 2) 268
circuit diagram (2 of 2) 269
classes, HP Technical
Training 258
cleaning
ADF pickup-roller
assembly 55
exterior of product 49
flatbed scanner glass 49
high-voltage connection
points 234
high-voltage contacts 233
paper path 56
pickup roller 52
product 49
scanner-cover backing 51
tray 2 pickup roller 52
cleaning page 56
cleaning page, printing 241
cleaning paper path
control panel 57
HP ToolboxFX 57
clearing
ADF, jams 180
duplexer 184
input-tray areas 182
output-bin areas 186
print-cartridge areas 188
stapler 189
clearing jams
ADF 180
CO operations 87
comparing
features 3
component diagrams
major 266
computer
security features 87
Configuration page 237
connectors
fax card 261
formatter 260
control panel
bezel part numbers 255
bezel, removing 119
button description 7
cleaning paper path 57
display, troubleshooting 227
faceplate, install 25
menus 191
menus, access 191
messages,
troubleshooting 169
removing 119
secondary menu 199
Service menu 241
service menu 235
controls
hook switch control 90
convenience stapler
jams, clearing 189
specifications 4
copy
tray selection 29
copy quality
test 96
copy setup menu 192
copy-quality test 96
copying
media, troubleshooting 215
quality, troubleshooting 214
setup menu 192
size, troubleshooting 217
troubleshooting 214, 217
covers
left, removing 102
part numbers 282
rear, removing 106
right, removing 100
top, removing 108
creases, troubleshooting 209
crooked pages 209
curled media 209, 236
current control, fax line 91
Customer Care Online 258
D
dark copies 215
data path
fax 90
dc controller 78
defaults, restoring 236, 241
defects, repetitive 259
Demo page, printing 238
Developer's menu 201
device detection, downstream
fax 90
device information page
HP ToolboxFX 63
device polling
HP ToolboxFX 65
diagrams
troubleshooting 259
dialing
fax 195
troubleshooting 222
dialing, pulse 90
digital subscriber line (DSL),
troubleshooting 228
dimensions
media 16
DIMM door, locating 6
DIMMs
adding 30
installing 30
part numbers 248
Director, Macintosh 13
display, troubleshooting control
panel 227
disposal, end-of-life 330
distinctive ring 88
340 Index ENWW
documentation
getting started guide,
languages 258
user guide, languages 257
Web sites, technical
support 258
door
print-cartridge door,
removing 104
dots per inch (dpi)
print settings 204
specifications 4
dots, troubleshooting 206
downstream device detection
fax 90
dpi (dots per inch)
faxing 195
print settings 204
specifications 4
drivers
specifications 4
supported 9
drum rotation test 230
DSL, troubleshooting 228
duplex assembly, removing 135
duplex solenoid, removing 145
duplex-drive gears, removing 143
duplexer
jams, clearing 184
duplexing assembly, part
numbers 302
duplexing-drive assembly, part
numbers 298
E
e-label reader 139
e-mail alerts 59
electrical specifications 324
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 94
embedded Web server (EWS)
browsers supported 12
features 66
setting password 67
end-of-life disposal 330
engine control system 78
engine controller assembly (ECU),
removing 153
engine test 231
engine-controller assembly (ECU),
part numbers 294
environmental specifications 20,
325
environmental stewardship
program 329
error mesages
ADF paper jams 75
paper jams, ADF 75
error messages
control panel 169
critical 177
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 94
EU statement for telecom
operation 334
European Union, waste
disposal 331
Event log
HP ToolboxFX 59
express software installation
included components list 10
F
faceplate, install control panel 25
factory-set defaults,
restoring 236, 241
faded print 206
fan, removing 141
fax
activity log 239
answer mode 196
billing (metering) tone
filters 91
billing code report,
printing 240
cables, part numbers 248
call report, printing 239
checklist, troubleshooting 218
data path 90
distinctive ring 88
downstream current
detection 90
error messages 172
factory-set defaults,
restoring 241
fax card 89
fax pages, storage 91
fax subsystem 89
fax-quality test 97
flash memory storage 91
functions 87
hook state 90
hook switch control 90
jams, troubleshooting 179,
225
line current control 91
operations 87
operations, PSTN 87
page storage 91
performance,
troubleshooting 226
phone book 60
phone book, printing 239
PSTN operations 87
pulse dialing 90
receive log 62
receiving 87
receiving, troubleshooting 219
report, printing 239
reports 193
reports, troubleshooting 226
ring detect 91
ring type 196
safety isolation 89
safety protection circuitry 89
security features,
computer 87
security features, network 87
send log, HP ToolboxFX 62
sending, troubleshooting 222
stored fax pages 91
T.30 protocol trace report 242
test, fax quality 97
troubleshooting 218
voice-call,
troubleshooting 224
fax card
CODEC 89
connectors 261
DSP 89
fax subsystem 89
hook switch control 90
part numbers 280
pulse dialing 90
regional versions 89
ring detect 91
safety isolation 89
safety-protection circuitry 89
fax functions menu 191
fax job status menu 191
fax page storage 91
fax ports, locating 6
ENWW Index 341
fax reports, printing 193
fax send log
HP ToolboxFX 62
fax setup menu 194
fax subsystem
fax card 89
Fax tab
HP ToolboxFX 59
fax tab, HP ToolboxFX
fax receive log 62
fax send log 62
log, fax receive 62
log, fax send 62
fax, performance
226
fax-quality test 97
faxing
voice over IP (VoIP)
services 88
FCC compliance 328
features
product 4
feed system, ADF 73
field replaceable units (FRUs)
removing 93
replacing 93
Finnish laser safety
statement 337
firmware updates 243
flash memory, fax 91
flat flexible cables (FFCs) 137
flatbed scanner
cleaning glass 49
load originals 26
font list 237
formatter
connectors 260
part numbers 280
removing 132
fraud hotline 48
fuser
error 177
warranty 321
fuser assembly, part number 304
fuser, removing 147
G
gears
duplex-drive, removing 143
Getting Started Guide 2, 258
glass, cleaning 49
gray background,
troubleshooting 207
guides. See documentation
H
half-self-test functional check 232
heating element check 233
Help (Documentation) tab
HP ToolboxFX 62
high-voltage PCA 78
high-voltage power supply,
checking 233
hook state
fax 90
hook switch control 90
HP Customer Care Online 258
HP Director, Macintosh 13
HP fraud hotline 48
HP jewel, part number 280
HP Printing Supplies Returns 35
HP Recycling Program 35
HP Technical Training 258
HP ToolboxFX
Alerts tab 59
cleaning paper path 57
device information page 63
device polling 65
Event log 59
factory-set defaults,
restoring 241
fax phone book 60
Fax tab 59
features 58
Help (Documentation) tab 62
managing product 58
Network Settings tab 66
paper handling page 64
Paper Types settings 64
PCL 5e, print driver
settings 66
PostScript, print driver
settings 66
print driver settings, PCL
5e 66
print driver settings,
PostScript 66
Print Quality settings 64
Print Settings tab 65
Printing tab 65
Service tab 65
status alerts 59
Status tab 58
system requirements 58
System Settings tab 63
system setup 65
Troubleshooting tab 240
viewing 58
HP ToolboxFX, fax tab
fax receive log 62
log, fax receive 62
log, fax send 62
send log 62
humidity specifications
environment 325
I
IC CS-03 requirements 333
image quality
archive print setting 236, 242
cleaning page, printing 241
copy, troubleshooting 214
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
print, troubleshooting 204,
205
repetitive image defects 259
scans, troubleshooting 211,
213
image-formation system
operations 83
testing 232
importing
fax phone book, HP
ToolboxFX 60
HP ToolboxFX, fax phone
book 60
information pages
Configuration 237
Demo 238
menu map 237, 238
Supplies Status 237
T.30 protocol trace report 242
usage 238
ink cartridges. See print cartridges
input tray
load media 28
input trays. See trays
input-tray areas
jams, clearing 182
342 Index ENWW
install
ADF input tray 23
control-panel faceplate 25
tray 3 24
installation, software
included components list,
express 9
included components list,
recommended 9
installing
control-panel faceplate 25
DIMMs 30
memory, DIMMs 30
interface ports
cables, ordering 248
locating 6, 260
types included 4
interlock assembly, removing 152
internal assembly
removing 122
replacing 122
internal components 76
internal components, part
numbers 286
J
jam detection
ADF 75
trailing edge detection,
ADF 75
jams
ADF, clearing 180
alerts 59
causes of 179
duplexer, clearing 184
fax 225
fax, clearing 180
locating 180
output-bin, clearing 186
preventing 190
print cartridge area,
clearing 188
stapler, clearing 189
trays, clearing 182
jewel, part number 280
K
Korean EMI statement 336
L
languages, documentation 257
laser safety statements 336, 337
laser/scanner
removing 137
laser/scanner system
operations 80
left cover, removing 102
life expectancies, supplies 34
light copies 215
light print, troubleshooting 206
line current control, fax 91
lines, troubleshooting
copies 215
printed pages 206
scans 213
load
originals on flatbed scanner or
ADF 26
load media
optional tray 3 28
tray 1 27
tray 2 28
loading
media 26
paper 26
stapler cassette 39
staples 39
localized user guides 257
locating
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 5
bins 5
cartridge-door release 5
control panel 5
DIMM door 5
interface ports 5
internal components 76
jams, paper/media 180
power connector 5
power switch 5
print cartridge 5
print-cartridge door latch 5
rear output door 5
stapler 5
trays 5
logs, fax
activity 239
billing codes 240
call (last fax sent or
received) 239
phone book 239
troubleshooting 226
loose toner, troubleshooting 208
M
Macintosh
drivers supported 9
Intel Core Processor 9
Macintosh Configure
Device 13
PDEs 14
PPC 9
software components 13
system requirements 21
uninstall software 15
Macintosh Configure Device
viewing 13, 67
main gear assembly,
removing 162
main motor, removing 158
main-drive assembly, part
numbers 296
major component diagrams 266
managing product
HP ToolboxFX 58
manuals. See documentation
material restrictions 330
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 331
media
ADF feeding operations 73
ADF, sizes supported 222
curled, troubleshooting 209,
236
default size for tray 29
feeding operations 81
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
jams 179
loading 26
pickup/feed/delivery
system 81
specifications 16
supported sizes 16
types to avoid 17
wrinkled 209
See also paper
media jams
ADF, clearing 180
clearing 179
See also jams
ENWW Index 343
media types
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
memory
error messages 171
flash, fax 91
installing 30
NVRAM initialization 235
part numbers 248
memory, DIMMs
installing 30
memory-tag-reader assembly,
removing 139
menu
control panel, access 191
Copy setup 192
Developer's 201
Fax functions 191
Fax Job status 191
Fax setup 194
Reports 193
secondary service 200
Service 199
System setup 197
menu (secondary)
control panel, access 199
menu map, printing 238
menus
control panel 191
Service 241
service 235
mercury specifications 36
mercury-free product 330
messages
control panel 169
critical 177
Microsoft Windows
drivers supported 9
model number, locating 8
moisture on the trailing edge,
troubleshooting 210
motor, removing main 158
multipurpose tray. See tray 2
N
nameplate, part numbers 280
network
device polling, HP Toolbox
FX 65
DSL, troubleshooting 228
HP ToolboxFX, device
polling 65
security features 87
network port
locating 6
network report 238
Network Settings tab
HP ToolboxFX 66
New Zealand telecom
statements 334
noise specifications 325
non-HP print cartridges 48
non-HP supplies
HP policy 48
O
off-hook 90
on-hook 90
on/off switch, locating 5
Online Customer Care, HP 258
operating environment,
specifications 20, 325
operating systems, supported 9
operation sequence 70
operations
ADF 73
engine control system 78
fax, PSTN 87
image-formation system 83
laser/scanner system 80
pickup/feed/delivery
system 81
PSTN 87
optical system operations 72
options. See settings
order supplies 34
ordering supplies and
accessories 247, 248
output bins
locating 5
output quality
archive print setting 236, 242
cleaning page, printing 241
copy, troubleshooting 214
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
print, troubleshooting 204,
205
repetitive image defects 259
scans, troubleshooting 211,
213
P
PABX lines, troubleshooting 228
pages
skewed 209
paper
ADF feeding operations 73
ADF, sizes supported 222
curled, troubleshooting 209,
236
feeding operations 81
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
jams 179
loading 26
pickup/feed/delivery
system 81
specifications 16
supported sizes 16
types to avoid 17
wrinkled 209
See also media
paper handling page
HP ToolboxFX 64
paper jams
ADF detection operations 75
ADF, clearing 180
clearing 179
detection operations, pickup/
feed/delivery system 81
error messages, ADF 75
locating 180
trailing edge detection,
ADF 75
See also jams
paper path
ADF 74
ADF feeding operations 74
cleaning 56
paper path, cleaning 241
paper types
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
part numbers
ADF 272
cables 248
cartridge door
components 284
control-panel bezels 255
covers 282
duplexing assembly 302
duplexing-drive assembly 298
344 Index ENWW
engine-controller
assembly 294
fax card 280
formatter 280
fuser assembly 304
internal components 286
jewel 280
main-drive assembly 296
memory 248
nameplate 280
scanner 272
screws 271
stapler 278
supplies 248
trays 249, 300
user guides 257
parts
245
field replaceable units
(FRUs) 93
internal assemblies 122
ordering 247
removal-order list 98
removing 93
replacing 93
user-replaceable 94
PCAs, diagrams 265
PCL 5e print drivers
HP ToolboxFX settings 66
PCL, PCL6, PS font list 237
PDEs, Macintosh 14
performance
troubleshooting 217
phone book
fax tab, HP ToolboxFX 60
HP ToolboxFX, fax tab 60
phone book, fax
HP ToolboxFX 60
printing 239
phone numbers
HP fraud hotline 48
HP Printing Supplies Returns
and Recycling Program 36
photosensitive drum rotation
test 230
physical specifications 324
pickup and feed system
ADF 73
pickup rollers
ADF assembly, replacing 110
cleaning 52
cleaning ADF 55
diagrams 264
replacing, tray 2 40
pickup solenoid (tray 2),
removing 162
pickup-and-feed assemblies
removing 160
pickup-roller assembly, ADF
replacing 110
pickup/feed/delivery system
operations 81
pliers, required 95
ports
cables, ordering 248
locating 6, 260
types included 4
post-service tests 96
PostScript print drivers
HP ToolboxFX settings 66
power
high-voltage PCA 78
requirements 324
sequence of operations 71
testing high-voltage 233
power connector, locating 6
power consumption 324
power cords, part numbers 248
power supplies
fax line current control 91
power supply
high-voltage contacts
check 233
stapler, removing 124
stapler, removing bracket and
strap 127
power switch, locating 5
power-switch PCA, removing 130
preservice checklist 95
print cartridge area jams,
clearing 188
print cartridges
alerts 59
door release, locating 5
drum rotation test 230
high-voltage contacts 233
HP fraud hotline 48
non-HP 48
part numbers 248
recycle 35
recycling 329
removing 99
replacing 37
status page, printing 237
warranty 321
print defects
troubleshooting 205
print driver
included components list 9
included components list,
Macintosh 10
print drivers
supported 9
print drivers, PCL 5e
HP ToolboxFX settings 66
print drivers, PostScript
HP ToolboxFX settings 66
print engine
laser/scanner assembly,
removing 137
removing laser/scanner
assembly 137
print media
supported 16
print quality
archive print setting 236, 242
checklist 205
cleaning page, printing 241
HP ToolboxFX settings 64
repetitive image defects 259
settings 204
test 96
troubleshooting 204, 205
Print Settings tab
HP ToolboxFX 65
print-cartridge door
removing 104
print-quality checklist 205
print-quality setting, 600 dpi 204
print-quality test 96
printer drivers
specifications 4
printing
change tray selection 29
cleaning page 56
fax report 239
loading media 26
loading paper 26
menu map 237, 238
network report 238
ENWW Index 345
Printing tab
HP ToolboxFX 65
priority input slot. See tray 1
problem solving. See
troubleshooting
product
ADF functions 72
back view description 6
basic operation 70
cleaning 49
electrostatic discarge
(ESD) 94
embedded Web server (EWS)
features 66
fax, functions 87
features 4
front view description 5
image-formation system 83
information pages 237
internal components 76
managing 58
model number, locating 8
operation sequence 70
pages per minute (ppm) 4
performance 4
scanner functions 72
sequence of operations 70
serial number, locating 8
specifications 4, 323
supplies, life expectancies 34
supplies, managing 34
unpacking 22
user-replaceable parts 94
product information pages 237
PSTN operations 87
pulse dialing 90
Q
quality
archive print setting 236, 242
cleaning page, printing 241
copy, troubleshooting 214
print settings 204
print, troubleshooting 204,
205
repetitive image defects 259
scans, troubleshooting 211,
213
R
rear cover, removing 106
rear output bin, locating 6
receiving
fax 87
receiving faxes
activity log, printing 239
call report, printing 239
distinctive ring 88
log, HP ToolboxFX 62
T.30 protocol trace report 242
troubleshooting 219
recommended software installation
included components list 10
recycle supplies
Web sites 35
recycling
battery 36
HP printing supplies returns and
environmental program 330
mercury 36
restrictions 36
refilled print cartridges 48
regional versions
fax card 89
registration-roller assembly,
removing 161
regulatory information 328
removing
ac inlet cable, stapler 126
ADF assembly 115
ADF pickup-roller
assembly 110
ADF scanner glass 113
assembly, ADF 115
assembly, internal 122
bezel, control panel 119
bracket and strap, stapler 127
control panel, bezel 119
covers 100
doors 100
duplex assembly 135
duplex solenoid 145
duplex-drive gears 143
engine controller
assembly 153
external parts 100
fan 141
formatter 132
fuser 147
interlock assembly 152
internal assembly 122
laser/scanner 137
main gear assembly 162
main motor 158
memory-tag-reader
assembly 139
order of parts 98
panels 100
parts 93
parts, order 98
pickup solenoid (tray 2) 162
pickup-and-feed
assemblies 160
pickup-roller assembly,
ADF 110
power-switch PCA 130
registration-roller
assembly 161
scanner assembly 117
scanner glass, ADF 113
screws 94
speaker 128
stapler ac inlet cable 126
stapler assembly 122
stapler bracket and strap 127
transfer roller 160
removing parts
ADF assembly 115
ADF pickup-roller
assembly 110
ADF scanner glass 113
assembly, internal 122
bezel, control panel 119
cautions for 94
checklists 95
control panel, bezel 119
duplex assembly 135
duplex solenoid 145
duplex-drive gears 143
engine controller
assembly 153
fan 141
formatter 132
fuser 147
interlock assembly 152
internal assembly 122
laser/scanner 137
main gear assembly 162
main motor 158
346 Index ENWW
memory-tag-reader
assembly 139
order 98
pickup-and-feed
assemblies 160
pickup-roller assembly,
ADF 110
power supply, stapler 124
power-switch PCA 130
print cartridges 99
print-cartridge door 104
registration-roller
assembly 161
scanner assembly 117
scanner glass, ADF 113
speaker 128
stapler ac inlet cable 126
stapler assembly 122
stapler power supply 124
stapler power supply bracket
and strap 127
tools, required 95
transfer roller 160
repair. See service
repetitive defects,
troubleshooting 210, 259
replace
supplies, life expectancies 34
replacing
ADF pickup-roller
assembly 110
ADF scanner glass 113
assemblies, internal 122
internal assemblies 122
pads, separation 45
parts 93
pickup roller, tray 2 40
pickup-roller assembly,
ADF 110
roller, pickup 40
scanner glass, ADF 113
screws 94
separation pads 45
tray 2 pickup roller 40
replacing parts
ADF pickup-roller
assembly 110
assemblies, internal 122
internal assemblies 122
pickup-roller assembly,
ADF 110
replacing print cartridges 37
report, product
fax 239
network 238
reports
configuration page 194
demo page 193
fax 193
menu map 193
network report 194
PCL 6 font list 194
PCL font list 194
PS font list 194
service page 194
supplies status page 194
usage page 194
reports menu 193
reports, fax
activity log 239
billing codes 240
call (last fax sent or
received) 239
phone book 239
troubleshooting 226
reports, product
Configuration page 237
Demo page 238
Supplies Status page 237
T.30 protocol trace 242
required tools
user-replaceable parts 95
requirements
system 21
resolution
print settings 204
specifications 4
restoring factory-set defaults 236,
241
right cover, removing 100
ring detect
fax card 91
RING operations 87
rollers
ADF pickup assembly,
replacing 110
cleaning ADF pickup 55
cleaning tray 2 pickup 52
diagrams 264
locating 76
repetitive image defects 259
replace tray 2 pickup 40
transfer, removing 160
S
safety isolation
fax 89
safety statements 336, 337
safety-protection circuitry
fax 89
scanner
assembly, removing 117
cleaning glass 49
cleaning scanner-cover
backing 51
components 274
diagrams 267
functions 72
load originals 26
optical system operations 72
part numbers 254, 272
removing assembly 117
scanner-cover backing,
cleaning 51
scanning
blank pages,
troubleshooting 213
quality, troubleshooting 211,
213
speed, troubleshooting 212
troubleshooting 211
scatter, troubleshooting 210
schedules, HP Technical
Training 258
screwdrivers, required 95
screws
removing 94
replacing 94
types of 271
secondary service menu 200
security features
computer 87
network 87
sending faxes
activity log, printing 239
call report, printing 239
log, HP ToolboxFX 62
ENWW Index 347
T.30 protocol trace report 242
troubleshooting 222
sensors
ADF 74, 75
form sensor, ADF 75
locating 263
media detection 81
paper-present sensor,
ADF 75
trailing edge detection,
ADF 75
separation pads
diagrams 264
replacing 45
sequence of operations 70
serial number, locating 8
service
after-service check list 96
before service checklist 95
checklist, after service 96
checklist, before service 95
checklist, post-service 96
checklist, preservice 95
critical error messages 177
HP ToolboxFX settings 65
part numbers 248
post-service checklist 96
preservice checklist 95
tools, required 95
Service menu 199, 241
service menu 235
service tab
HP ToolboxFX 65
settings
Configuration page 237
factory-set defaults,
restoring 236, 241
NVRAM initialization 235
size 324
skewed pages 209
slow speed, troubleshooting
faxing 226
scanning 212
smeared toner,
troubleshooting 207
software
components 9
drivers supported 9
HP ToolboxFX 58
Macintosh 13
Macintosh Configure
Device 67
supported operating
systems 9
system requirements 21
uninstall 15
Windows 12
software installation
included components list,
express 9
included components list,
recommended 9
solenoid
duplex, removing 145
pickup (tray 2), removing 162
solenoids 262
speaker, removing 128
specifications
acoustic emissions 325
electrical 324
environmental 325
media 16
paper 16
physical 324
product features 4
specks, troubleshooting 206
speed
fax, troubleshooting 226
scanning, troubleshooting 212
spots, troubleshooting 206
staple cassette
life expectancy 34
loading 39
part number 248
specifications 4
stapler
ac inlet cable, removing 126
assembly, removing 122
jams, clearing 189
loading staples 39
locating 5
part numbers 278
power supply bracket and strap,
removing 127
power supply, removing 124
removing stapler
assembly 122
staples, loading 39
troubleshooting 227
stapler ac inlet cable
removing 126
stapler power supply
bracket and strap,
removing 127
removing 124
staples, loading 39
static precautions 94
status
fax job 191
Supplies Status page,
printing 237
status alerts
HP ToolboxFX 59
Status tab
HP ToolboxFX 58
stored fax pages 91
storing
environmental
specifications 325
fax pages in flash memory 91
supplies 35
strategy
parts, removal 94
parts, replacement 94
streaks, troubleshooting 206
supplies
alerts 59
HP fraud hotline 48
life expectancies 34
managing 34
non-HP 48
non-HP supplies policy 48
order 34
ordering 247
print cartridge, replacing 37
print cartridge, storage 35
recycling 35, 329
replacing print cartridges 37
status page 237
storage 35
support, technical 258
supported
drivers 9
operating systems 9
print drivers 9
supported media 16
switches 263
system requirements 21
348 Index ENWW
System Settings tab
HP ToolboxFX 63
system setup
HP ToolboxFX settings 65
System setup menu 197
T
T.30 protocol trace report 242
technical support 258
Technical Training 258
Telephone Consumer Protection
Act 333
telephone numbers
HP fraud hotline 48
HP Printing Supplies Returns
and Recycling Program 36
temperature specifications
environment 325
tests
copy-quality 96
drum rotation 230
engine 231
fax-quality 97
half-self functional check 232
heating element 233
high-voltage power
supply 233
post-service 96
print-quality 96
text, troubleshooting 208
TIP operations 87
toner
cleaning page, printing 241
loose, troubleshooting 208
scatter, troubleshooting 210
smeared, troubleshooting 207
specks, troubleshooting 206
toner cartridges. See print
cartridges
tools, required
user-replaceable parts 95
top cover, removing 108
trailing edge detection
ADF 75
Training, HP Technical 258
transfer roller, removing 160
transfer unit warranty 321
tray 1
jams, clearing 182
load 27
locating 5
solenoids 262
tray 2
cleaning pickup roller 52
jams, clearing 182
load 28
locating 5
part numbers 300
pickup solenoid,
removing 162
replacing pickup roller 40
replacing separation pad 45
separation pad, replace 45
solenoids 262
tray 3
install 24
jams, clearing 182
load 28
locating 5
part number 249
part numbers 254, 300
replacing separation pad 45
separation pad, replace 45
trays
alerts 59
copy, changing selection 29
default media size 29
feeding operations 81
install ADF input 23
jams, clearing 182
locating 5
part numbers 249
pickup/feed/delivery
system 81
troubleshooting
ADF 229
blank scans 213
checklist 166
checklist, fax 218
cleaning page 241
control panel display 227
control panel messages 169
copy quality 214
copy size 217
copying 214, 217
critical error messages 177
curled media 209, 236
diagrams 259
dialing 222
drum rotation test 230
DSL 228
engine test 231
faded print 206
fax 218
fax jams 225
fax reports 226
half self-test 232
heating element 233
image formation 232
image quality 204
jams 179
lines, copies 215
lines, printed pages 206
lines, scans 213
loose toner 208
media-handling 215
moisture on the trailing
edge 210
NVRAM initialization 235
output quality 204
PABX lines 228
paper jams, clearing 179
performance 217
print defects 205
print quality 204
product information pages and
reports 237
receiving faxes 219
repetitive defects 210
scan quality 211, 213
scanned image 211
scanning 211
sending faxes 222
skewed pages 209
speed, faxing 226
staple jams 189
stapler 227
T.30 protocol trace report 242
text 208
toner scatter 210
toner smear 207
toner specks 206
voice-call 224
wrinkles 209
Troubleshooting tab, HP
ToolboxFX 240
U
Uninstall software
Macintosh 15
ENWW Index 349
uninstall software
Add or Remove Programs 15
Windows 15
unpack the product 22
updating firmware 243
usage page, printing 238
USB port
locating 6
types included 4
User Guide 2
User guide
part numbers 257
user-replaceable parts
required tools 95
tools required 95
V
vertical lines,
troubleshooting 206
vertical white or faded
stripes 214
viewing
HP ToolboxFX 58
Macintosh Configure
Device 67
voice over IP (VoIP) services 88
voice-call
troubleshooting 224
voltage requirements 324
volume
settings 198
W
warning messages 169
warranty
print cartridge 321
product 319
transfer unit and fuser 321
wavy paper, troubleshooting 209
Web sites
HP Printing Supplies Returns
and Recycling www.hp.com/
go/recycleProgram 36
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 331
order supplies 34
ordering supplies 247
recycle supplies 35
technical support 258
weight 324
white or faded stripes 214
Windows
software components 12
system requirements 21
uninstall software 15
wrinkles, troubleshooting 209
350 Index ENWW
*CB532-90946*
*CB532-90946*
CB532-90946
© 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
www.s-manuals.com

Navigation menu